JP2019216966A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a fair and efficient game machine by providing predetermined restrictions to a setting condition of a determination probability in the game machine having a setting function of a determination probability.SOLUTION: When erasing game information in first memory holding means, a determination probability is changeable. When restoring game information, a change in a determination probability of determination means is disabled. When game information of the first memory holding means is erased and a determination probability of the determination means is not changed, game information in the first memory holding means is erased if setting information in second memory holding means is predetermined normal information, and a game is started with a determination probability of the determination means based on setting information of the second memory holding means. When game information in the first memory holding means is abnormal and setting information in the second memory holding means is predetermined normal information, game information in the first memory holding means is erased and a game can be started with a determination probability based on setting information in the second memory holding means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 47

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and is particularly applicable to a pachinko gaming machine and the like.

  2. Description of the Related Art Some conventional gaming machines execute a jackpot game in which a hit determination is made with a predetermined jackpot probability based on a ball entering a starting opening, and when the result of the hit determination becomes a jackpot, a jackpot is opened. Some game machines have a probability setting function of changing the big hit probability by performing a predetermined operation on a gaming machine by a game clerk or the like (for example, Patent Document 1).

  Further, a conventional gaming machine has a so-called backup function that retains a gaming state when power supply is cut off and returns the gaming state based on the retained memory when power is supplied again. Some had.

JP-A-10-57583

  When a gaming machine having a backup function as described above is equipped with a probability setting function, it is possible to change the setting while maintaining the gaming state, and depending on how these functions are used, it is easy to generate a big hit or This may cause fraud or make it impossible to provide a fair gaming machine.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and in a gaming machine equipped with a setting function of a determination probability, a fair and efficient gaming machine is provided by providing a predetermined restriction on a setting condition of the determination probability. Is provided.

A gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention for solving the above-described problems,
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
When the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific result, the special information execution means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner, and executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
Game information storage means for storing game information including a determination result by the determination means,
Setting probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
First storage holding means capable of holding the game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage;
A second storage unit that can store the setting information stored in the setting probability storage unit for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage;
When the power supply unit starts supplying power, based on the game information stored and held by the first storage unit, a game information restoration unit that can restore the game information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected,
When a predetermined input operation is performed, when the power supply unit starts supplying power, the game information stored and retained by the first storage and retention unit is erased, and a game information that is not restored when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected is restored. Information initialization means,
When the game information initialization means deletes the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed by the determination probability setting means,
When the game information restoring means restores the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means, it is impossible to change the determination probability of the determination means by the determination probability setting means,
In the case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is deleted and the determination probability of the determination means is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is predetermined normal information. In some cases, the game information stored and held by the first storage unit is deleted, and a game is started with a determination probability of the determination unit based on the setting information stored and held by the second storage unit,
In a case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is abnormal and the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is predetermined normal information, the first storage and holding is performed. The game information stored and retained by the means is deleted, and the game can be started with the determination probability of the determination means based on the setting information stored and retained by the second storage and retention means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the determination means has a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probabilities, selects a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, and determines the selected determination probability. It can be set as the judgment probability of. A setting probability storage unit for storing setting information indicating the selected (set) determination probability; a game information storage unit for storing game information including a determination result by the determination unit; and a game information storage unit for storing game information even after power supply is stopped. A first memory holding means for holding, a second memory holding means for storing and holding setting information even after the power supply is stopped, a game information restoring means for restoring the game information stored and held, and a memory held by a predetermined input operation Game information initializing means for erasing game information.

  Then, erasing the game information stored and held by the game information initializing means is a condition for changing the setting of the determination probability, and when not deleting the stored game information, the change of the setting of the determination probability is disabled. I have. When the stored game information is deleted and the setting of the determination probability is not changed, if the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is normal (that is, if there is no abnormality), the game information is deleted. The game is initialized, a determination probability based on the setting information stored and stored is set, and the game is started. Further, even when the game information stored and held by the game information initialization means is not deleted, if the stored game information is abnormal and the stored setting information is normal information, the game information is similarly deleted. The game is initialized by setting a determination probability based on the setting information stored and retained.

  Thereby, in order to change the current setting of the judgment probability to another judgment probability, it is necessary to initialize the game information, and the game state at the start of the game when the setting of the judgment probability is changed is initialized. The state can be set. This makes it possible to provide fair games. In addition, when the game information is initialized, if the change operation of the setting of the determination probability is not performed, if there is no abnormality in the stored setting information, the determination probability is set based on the stored setting information. To start the game. In addition, this allows the game information to be initialized even if the game information initialization unit does not perform an operation of deleting the game information when there is an abnormality in the stored game information due to occurrence of some abnormality. Further, if the setting information at this time is normal information, the game can be started without changing the setting of the determination probability. In addition, this eliminates the need to set the determination probability again at the time of initializing the game information, and enables efficient setting of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the second invention is the gaming machine of the first invention,
In the case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is abnormal and the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is not the normal information, it is determined that the game cannot be started. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the stored game information is deleted, but when the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), there is no abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means. , A determination probability is set based on the setting information, and the game is started. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding unit and when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding unit, the game is started in a state where there is an abnormality. It is impossible. In this way, if there is an abnormality in the setting information, without setting any determination probability, it is ensured that the game cannot be performed before the game starts, and that an unexpected disadvantage is caused to the game store or the player. It can be prevented.

The gaming machine of the third invention is the gaming machine of the first invention or the second invention,
If the game information stored and held by the first storage unit is abnormal and the setting information stored and held by the second storage unit is not the normal information, the first storage unit stores The game information is deleted, and the game can be started through the setting of the judgment probability of the judgment means by the judgment probability setting means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the stored game information is deleted, but when the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), there is no abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means. , A determination probability is set based on the setting information, and the game is started. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding unit and when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding unit, the game is started in a state where there is an abnormality. The game can be started by erasing the game information and setting the judgment probability by the judgment probability setting means with a predetermined input operation. That is, when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means, the game can be started by deleting the game information and resetting the determination probability. Accordingly, when there is an abnormality in the setting information, it is necessary to set an arbitrary determination probability with a predetermined input operation before starting the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unexpected determination probability from being set or an abnormal determination probability from being set, and to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from occurring in a game store or a player. Become.

The gaming machine according to the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to the second invention or the third invention,
In a case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is deleted and the determination probability of the determination means is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is not predetermined normal information. when,
The information indicating that setting of the determination probability of the determination means by the determination probability setting means is required is provided on a predetermined display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game information stored and erased is deleted, but when the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is abnormal. Performs a notification on a predetermined display unit indicating that it is necessary to perform a predetermined input operation to set a predetermined determination probability by the determination probability setting unit. Thereby, even when the setting information has an abnormality and the game cannot be played (the game does not start), the means for canceling the game disabled state (to make the game playable) can be easily and clearly grasped. It becomes possible.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a fair and efficient gaming machine with a predetermined restriction on the setting condition of the determination probability setting function.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board of an example of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3 and is a view showing displays provided in the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a power supply board etc. It is a table | surface which shows the correspondence of the type of a hit, the opening pattern of a special winning opening, etc. (A) is a table showing random numbers related to special symbols acquired by the game control microcomputer, (B) is a table showing random numbers associated with ordinary symbols acquired by the game control microcomputer, and (C) is a reach determination table. Yes, (D) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a table showing a big hit determination table for each game mode. It is a table which shows the big hit probability etc. for every game mode. It is a table | surface which shows a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of an initialization process. It is a flowchart of a mode setting process. It is a flowchart of a mode confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a power-on notification process. It is a flowchart of an interruption process. It is a flowchart of a base display process. It is a flowchart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a general-purpose operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of processing during normal symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process. 7 is a flowchart of a special figure 2 random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol change processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 2 (small hitting game). It is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a process at the time of starting ball entry. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a mode setting monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of an initial process. It is a flowchart of a process at the time of no setting change. It is a timing chart in initial processing. It is a figure which shows a setting notification and board | substrate movable initial operation. 13 is a flowchart of an initial process according to another aspect 1. 15 is a flowchart of an initial process according to another aspect 2. 10 is a timing chart in an initial process according to another embodiment. 9 is a flowchart of a mode setting process according to the second embodiment. FIG. 14 is a block diagram of a power supply board and the like according to a third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of a mode setting process according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of a mode setting process according to the third embodiment. 14 is a flowchart of a power-on notification process according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a block diagram of a power supply board and the like according to a fifth embodiment. 18 is a flowchart of a main control main process according to the fifth embodiment. 19 is a flowchart of a mode setting process according to the fifth embodiment. 19 is a flowchart of a setting storage unit determination process according to the fifth embodiment. 19 is a flowchart of a base storage unit determination process according to the fifth embodiment. 17 is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 17 is a rear view of the gaming machine according to Embodiment 6. It is a perspective view showing the composition of the game board of Example 6. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the gaming machine frame according to the sixth embodiment in an open state. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of a second confirmation display unit according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of a second confirmation display unit according to another aspect of the sixth embodiment.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following, when the hit symbol is stopped and displayed along with the end of the symbol change display, a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing a hit game capable of providing a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) to a player. An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a game board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 has a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching the gaming board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching (fixing) the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island facility of the hall. The front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 (also referred to as an “open / close frame”) are pivotally supported at one end with respect to the outer frame 53 and can be opened and closed, respectively.

  In addition, the front frame 51 has a firing handle 60 for firing game balls with a firing intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player, and stores the game balls and can supply the stored game balls to the launch device side. A high ball hitting plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supplying tray 61 are provided. The front frame 51 also includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to) that can be operated by the player during the execution of a game effect executed as the game progresses. (Hereinafter simply referred to as “effect button 63”). The plurality of effect buttons can use different effect buttons depending on the type of game effect.

  The front frame 51 is provided with a movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) and a speaker 67, and the movable decorative member 17 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66. The movable total decorative member 17 is driven to rotate (with the back surface direction of the frame lamp 66 as a rotation axis) in accordance with the progress of the game effect and the like, and the frame lamp 66 is lit in a predetermined lighting mode. The movable decorative member 17 operates when a game effect (effect symbol variation effect) having a relatively high possibility of executing a big hit is executed. Further, the frame lamp 66 may indicate the possibility of executing a big hit depending on the lighting mode. The movable decorative member 17 also operates in a predetermined operation mode even during a big hit or an initial operation described later. Note that the configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the first embodiment, but may be any as long as it can detect an input from a player, or an input detecting means (for example, an input device in which the player directly touches the button section to perform input) , A retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc.) or a non-contact type input detecting means (a photoelectric type, etc.) for detecting that a part of the player's body has approached and performing an input. Good. In the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball fired by operating the firing handle 60 flows down is formed by being surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board lamp 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are protruded. Further, a ball return preventing piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, so that the game ball once guided to the game area can be prevented from returning to the launching device side.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 3, an image display device 7 including a liquid crystal display device is provided. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an "effect symbol display section") in which effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols 8") are displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R perform variable display in synchronization with a variable display of a first special symbol and a variable display of a second special symbol described below. The effect symbol display area 7b includes, for example, three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right", a left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and a medium effect is displayed in the middle symbol display area. The symbol 8C is displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right.

  Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from “1” to “9”, for example. The left, middle, and right effect symbols stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b are displayed on a first special symbol indicator 41a (also referred to as a "first special symbol display section") described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol and the result of the variable display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as a “second special symbol display section”) (that is, the special symbol hit / fail judgment) (Simply referred to as a "whether or not" determination) is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”.

  For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, it is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with the same three digits (also referred to as "hit effect symbol") such as "777". In the case of a small hit, the effect symbol can be stopped and displayed with a preset symbol such as "135" or a special symbol such as "3 ★ 3" (also called "small hit effect symbol"). It is. Further, in the case of a miss, at least one of the three symbols such as “637” and “373” may be differently displayed in a staggered pattern (also referred to as “missing effect symbol”) to stop and display the effect symbol. It is possible.

  Thus, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the effect symbols stopped and displayed. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol correctness determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but produces an effect. It is understood by looking at the effect symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b. The positions of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas do not need to be separately provided, and the display areas of the left, middle, and right effect symbols may be the entire symbol display area (effect symbol display area 7b). . In addition, as an aspect of the effect symbol change display, there is an aspect in which scroll display is performed in, for example, up and down, left and right, diagonal directions, and the like.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect (effect design game effect) using the effect symbol as described above, a hit game effect executed in accordance with the hit game, and a customer waiting A demonstration effect is displayed. In the effect design game effect, the hit game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to the effect design such as a numeral, an effect image other than the effect design such as a background image and a character image is displayed.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect suspension display area 9c (first effect suspension display unit) for displaying the first effect suspension 9a according to the number of first special figure suspensions described later. There is a second effect holding display area 9d (second effect holding display section) for displaying the second effect holding 9b in accordance with the number of second special figure holdings described later. According to the display mode (the number of displays) of the first effect hold or the second effect hold, the number of first special figure hold stored and the second special figure hold displayed on a first special figure hold display 43a (see FIG. 4) described later. The number of stored second special figure reservations displayed on the figure reservation display 43b can be easily shown to the player.

  A center decoration 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game balls can roll is provided below the center decorative body 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives game balls flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game balls from the warp exit, and guides them to the stage section 11. The game balls guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 can enter the first starting port 20 described later with a higher possibility than game balls not guided to the stage unit 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13 having an electric decoration member such as an LED (panel lamp 5), which can be turned on according to a game state, and which forms characters, figures and the like is arranged. I have.

  In addition, a movable decorative member 14 operable in accordance with a game effect is provided above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but, for example, with the execution of a game effect having a relatively high possibility of being hit, the movable decorative member 14 falls down, The decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of it becomes visible.

  As a result, the player has an increased sense of expectation of winning. Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is provided a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering a game ball does not change. Based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for a special symbol hit determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, a hit / non-hit determination related to the first special symbol (first special symbol hit / fail Determination) is executed, and the first special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination of the correctness.

  Below the first starting port 20, there is provided a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a "variable starting port") including a variable second starting port 21 in which the ease of entering a game ball changes. . Based on the entry of the game ball into the second opening 21, a random number for determining a special symbol hit / fail is acquired, and if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the hit / non-hit determination of the second special symbol (the second special symbol hit / non-judgment) ) Is executed and the second special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail determination. The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23.

  By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than in the first mode. is there. The movable member 23 is driven by a second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows the game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and disables the game ball to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. I have. The second starting port 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than in the open state. It is not necessary that the ball cannot be entered.

  On the right side of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, a first big winning device 31 provided with a first big winning port 30 (also referred to as a "first variable winning port") is provided. The first big winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and opens and closes the first big winning opening 30 by operating the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first special winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). The first large winning opening 30 allows game balls to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first variable ball entry port 31 is opened and closed by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32 and cannot enter the ball (closed state) and can enter the ball (opened state). It can be changed to

  In addition, above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3 and at the lower right of the center decorative body 10, a second large winning device 36 having a second large winning opening 35 ("second variable winning opening"). "). The second big winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member (blade member) 37, and opens and closes the second big winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. The opening and closing member 37 is driven by a second special winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). The second large winning opening 35 allows game balls to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, due to the opening and closing operation of the opening / closing member 37, the second variable ball entry port 36 is in a ball-incapable state in which game balls cannot enter (closed state) and a ball-enterable state in which game balls can enter (open state) It can be changed to

  In addition, the second special winning device 36 specifies a specific area 39 and a non-specific area 49 through which a game ball entering the second special winning opening 35 can pass, and a game ball entering the second special winning opening 35. A movable piece 150 for guiding (sorting) to the region 39 or the non-specific region 49 is included. The movable piece 150 is driven by a movable piece solenoid 151 (see FIG. 5). The movable piece 150 is opened when the opening operation of the second special winning opening 35, in other words, the opening operation of the opening and closing member 37 is started. The operation starts. When the movable piece solenoid 151 is OFF, that is, when the movable piece 150 is not operating (non-operating state), the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 is guided to the non-specific area 49, and It becomes impossible to pass through 39.

  On the other hand, when the movable piece solenoid 151 is ON, that is, when the movable piece 150 is operating (operating state), the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 is guided to the specific area 39, and 39. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a high-probability state described later is generated based on detection that at least one of the gaming balls entering the second special winning opening 35 has passed through the specific area 39. . That is, the specific area 39 is a positive change operation port. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first big winning device 31.

  In the right area of the center decoration 10 in the game area 3, a gate 28 (game ball passage opening) through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not the symbol is correct is normally obtained, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is opened. When the symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, the normal symbol is variably displayed and stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol hit / non-judgment judgment. When the hit ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, the second start port 21 is opened.

  Further, a plurality of general entrances 27 are provided below the game area 3. In this manner, the game area 3 where various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into The way of hitting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called left hitting, and the way of hitting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called right hitting. . In the present pachinko gaming machine 1, at the start of the game, the player hits the first starting port 20 with a left-handed shot. On the other hand, when the game state changes due to a hit in the hit judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, the gate 28, the second starting port 21, the first big winning port 30, and the second The aim is to get into the special winning opening 35. When a game ball enters the first starting port, the second starting port, the first winning port, the second winning port, and the general entry port, the game port is predetermined at each entry port. A number of game balls (also called "prize balls") are paid out.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at a lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display unit 40 has a first special symbol display unit 41a (first special symbol display unit) for changing and displaying the first special symbol, and a second special symbol display unit for changing and displaying the second special symbol. The device 41b (second special symbol display unit) and the ordinary symbol display unit 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for changing and stopping and displaying ordinary symbols are included. In addition, the main display 40 includes a first special figure suspension display 43a that displays the number of pieces of the validity determination information (first special figure reservation) related to the first special symbol, and the validity determination information (second number) related to the second special symbol. A second special figure hold display 43b for displaying the number of stored 2 special figure hold) and a general figure hold display 44 for displaying the number of operation hold (general figure hold) of the ordinary symbol display 42 are included. ing.

  The main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination or the second special symbol hit / fail determination has become a hit (specific result). When the result of the special symbol hit determination is a hit, a round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the hit game to be executed, a game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and a launch of the game ball. A firing direction indicator 47 is included which indicates the direction, ie, whether to strike right or to strike left. Various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit described later.

  The change display of the first special symbol is performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 20. The change display of the second special symbol is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure reservation display unit 43.

  In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed for a predetermined period of time and then stopped and then stopped, and the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 depending on the special symbol (stop symbol) displayed and stopped. The result of the lottery (special symbol success / failure judgment, big hit lottery) is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol determination. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the stop pattern is displayed in an open pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol stopped and displayed. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) for opening the first big winning port 30 or the second big winning port 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41 a is configured by eight LEDs indicated by “i to p”, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is the first result (15R big hit), the three LEDs “ijn” are turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off. When the second result (2R big hit) is obtained, the four LEDs of “jnkl” are turned on, and the remaining LEDs are turned off. When the third result (small hit) is obtained, the four LEDs “mnop” are turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off. In the case of disconnection, two LEDs of “lo” can be turned on, and the remaining LEDs can be turned off.

  The second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a" to "h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. As in the case of the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display modes are set to different display modes according to the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. Also, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined fluctuating time. In the fluctuating display, for example, light repeatedly flows from left to right in a predetermined order. In this manner, each LED can be turned on.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various kinds of information such as a random number for a special symbol hit determination (“acquisition information”) are based on the entering ball. ), And the obtained various information is temporarily stored in a special figure reservation storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. More specifically, if the ball enters the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a as the first special figure reservation, and if the ball enters the second starting port 21, the second special figure is stored. It is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 85b as a hold. An upper limit is set for the number of (undigested) special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as “first acquisition information storage unit” and “second acquisition information storage unit”, respectively, and are also generally referred to as “acquisition information storage unit”. .

  The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is consumed when the special symbol change display based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the special figure reservation means that a special symbol corresponding to the special figure reservation is judged (for example, a big hit, a small hit, a miss or a big hit type, etc.) and the special result for indicating the judgment result. Executing the symbol change display. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the special symbol fluctuation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the ball entry, that is, the special symbol fluctuation Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, the right to determine whether or not to enter the special symbol for the entering ball can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

  The number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. More specifically, the first special map reservation display 43a is composed of two LEDs “uv”, and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special map reservation, the first special map reservation display 43a is provided. Displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “u □ v □” (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1 In this case, the display mode may be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. When the number of reservations is 2, a display mode in which the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as "u.multidot.v.quadrature." Further, when the number of reservations is 3, a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as “u • v •”, can be adopted.

  When the number of reservations is four (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green, such as “u v v”, to provide a display mode. The second special figure hold display 43b is composed of two LEDs “wx”. By controlling the LED display according to the number of the second special figure hold, the second special figure hold is displayed. It displays the number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, a display mode is used in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “w □ x □” (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green). 4 is also set in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

  The normal symbol change display is performed when a game ball passes through the gate 28. In the ordinary symbol display 42, the ordinary symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined period of time, then stopped and displayed, and the result of the ordinary symbol hit determination based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is displayed by the stopped and displayed ordinary symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol hit / fail determination. When the stop-displayed ordinary symbol is a predetermined specific ordinary symbol (hit ordinary symbol), an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state is performed. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays the ordinary symbol according to the result of the ordinary symbol pass / fail determination according to the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a hit, the hit ordinary symbol in which both LEDs are turned on is stopped and displayed as "s @ t @" (for example, ■: turned on, □: turned off). If the determination result is out of order, an out-of-usual ordinary design in which only the t LED is turned on, such as "s @ t @", is displayed. Note that the off-normal design is not a specific normal design. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on / off. is there.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as “acquisition information”) such as a random symbol for determining whether or not a symbol is correct is acquired based on the passage, and the acquired various information is obtained. Is temporarily stored as a general drawing reservation in the general drawing storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. An upper limit is set for the number of general drawing reservations that can be stored in the general drawing storage unit 86, and the upper limit in the first embodiment is four.

  The general figure holding stored in the general figure holding storage unit 86 is exhausted when it becomes possible to change and display the ordinary symbol based on the general figure holding. The term “extension of the ordinary symbol holding” means that a random number for the ordinary symbol success / failure determination corresponding to the ordinary symbol holding is determined, and a variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed to indicate the determination result. Therefore, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, when the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed at the time of passing, that is, when the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even with this, the right to determine whether or not to pass the normal symbol can be reserved with the predetermined number as an upper limit. Then, the number of such general-purpose reservations is displayed on the general-purpose reservation display 44.

  More specifically, the general-purpose reservation display 44 includes two LEDs “qr”, and displays the number of general-purpose reservations by turning on the LEDs according to the number of general-purpose reservations. is there. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as “q □ r □” (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights red, ▲: lights green), and the number of holds is 1 In this case, the display mode may be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red, such as "qr". Also, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is determined in the same manner as in the first special figure reservation display 43a.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 (also referred to as a “main control unit” and a “game control unit, ), A sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a “sub-control unit”, also referred to as an “effect control unit”) that performs control related to effects performed in accordance with the progress of the game, and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls. Substrate 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”), effect design 8 displayed on image display device 7, design displayed on effect display 102, first effect hold display 103 a, second effect hold display 103 b, etc. And an image control board 100 (also referred to as an “image control unit”) for performing the display control of the above. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case housing a main control board 80 is provided substantially at the center of the rear side (rear side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case. Is provided with a storage case such as an image control board that stores the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100. A case is provided. On the lower left side of the main control board case, a payout control board case for housing the payout control board is provided, and on the right side, a power supply board case for housing the power supply board 109 is provided.

  On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing a program and the like for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be provided externally. In the RAM of the game control microcomputer 81, the above-mentioned special figure reservation storage unit 85 (the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b), the general figure reservation storage unit 86, and the drop of the power supply voltage are stored. A backup area 161 (also referred to as a "main control backup area") or the like for storing information (also referred to as "game state information") indicating a game state at the time of detection (in the case of power interruption) is provided. I have. The backup area 161 is an evacuation area for storing predetermined game state information to be backed up for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped, among the information stored in the RAM of the main control unit 80. It is. Then, when the power supply is restarted, it is possible to return (restore) a predetermined game state when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected, based on the game state information stored and held in the backup area 161. . These processes are also referred to as “game state information restoring means”.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the main control board 80 includes a probability of judging a big hit, a probability of judging a small hit, a big hit, A "mode setting switch 82" is provided which can externally change the probability of determining the type of jackpot when determined by a predetermined input operation. As shown in FIG. 6, the "mode setting switch 82" is a slide-type switch that can switch the setting in five stages. Also, a game clerk or the like (mode setter, probability setter) slides the operation portion 82a of the mode setting switch 82 leftward or rightward under specific conditions described later (by performing a predetermined input operation). ), It is possible to select any game mode. In FIG. 6, it is assumed that the operation unit 82a is located at a position where "game mode 3" is selected, and that the game mode is set to "game mode 3".

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an arbitrary game mode can be selected from five types of game modes by an input operation to the mode setting switch 82. As five types of game modes, a game mode 1, a game mode 2, a game mode 3, a game mode 4, and a game mode 5 are provided. Then, in FIG. 6, the game mode can be set to the game mode 1 by locating the operation unit 82a at the leftmost set position (position [1]) of the mode setting switch 82. Further, by setting the operation section 82a at the second setting position from the left of the mode setting switch 82 (the position of [2]), it is possible to set the game mode to the game mode 2. Further, by setting the operation unit 82a at the third setting position (position [3]) from the left of the mode setting switch 82, the setting of the game mode can be set to the game mode 3 (FIG. 6). Setting mode). Further, by setting the operation section 82a at the second setting position from the right of the mode setting switch 82 (position [4]), the setting of the game mode can be set to the game mode 4. In addition, by setting the operation unit 82a at the setting position (position [5]) at the right end of the mode setting switch 82, the setting of the game mode can be set to the game mode 5 (see FIG. 6). .

  By moving (positioning) the operation portion 82a of the mode setting switch 82 to an arbitrary setting position, the game mode can be set to an arbitrary game mode of the setter. The setting state of the mode setting switch 82, that is, the position of the operation unit 82a is monitored by the CPU of the main control board 80, and the position of the operation unit 82a of the mode setting switch 82 (selected by the operator) is monitored by the CPU. (The selection information indicating the game mode performed). Then, when an operator such as a game clerk performs a predetermined input operation on the mode setting switch 82 to change the game mode, and the selection information is changed, the CPU of the main control board 80 It is determined whether or not the change condition is satisfied (it is determined whether or not an operation has been performed under a specific condition). If the condition is satisfied, a game mode corresponding to the selection information is set (mode change) and the game mode is satisfied. If not, the game mode corresponding to the selection information is not set (the mode is not changed). When the change condition is satisfied, the means for setting (changing the setting) the game mode is also referred to as “determination probability setting means”. The mode setting switch 82 (including the operation unit 82a) is also referred to as “determination probability selection means”, and information indicating the position (selected setting) selected by the mode setting switch 82 is referred to as “selection information”. Also called.

  Here, each game mode (game mode 1 to game mode 5) will be described with reference to FIG. When the game mode is set to “game mode 1”, the jackpot probability (the probability of being determined as a big hit in the first special symbol hit determination and the probability of being determined as the big hit in the second special symbol hit determination) is low. It is 1/630 in the probability state (normal state) and 1/63 in the high probability state. The small hit probability is set at 1/160 in both the first special symbol hit / fail judgment and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. The big hit type (big hit type determination judgment) when the big hit in the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is 15R first big hit is 40%, 15R second big hit is 50%, and 2R third big hit is 10%. It is sorted by. The jackpot type determination random number is composed of 100 values from 0 to 99, and any value is obtained at the timing of entering the starting port (the first starting port or the second starting port). The jackpot type is determined. In the big hit type (big hit type determination determination) when the big hit is determined in the second special symbol hit / fail determination, the ratio of 15R fourth big hit is 100%. That is, if it is determined that the big hit in the second special symbol hit determination, it will be 15R fourth big hit without fail. The jackpot probability is also referred to as “determination probability”.

  Next, when the game mode is set to "game mode 2", the big hit probability (the probability of being determined as a big hit in the first special symbol win / fail determination and the probability of being determined as the big hit in the second special symbol win / fail determination) Is 1/315 in the low probability state (normal state) and 1/63 in the high probability state. Other conditions are the same as in the game mode 1. Next, when the game mode is set to “game mode 3”, the big hit probability (the probability of being determined as a big hit in the first special symbol hit / fail judgment and the probability of being determined as the big hit in the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) Is 1/210 in the low probability state (normal state) and 1/63 in the high probability state. Other conditions are the same as in the game mode 1. When these game modes 1 to 3 are compared, the big hit probability (the so-called first hit probability) in the low probability state is different, and the game mode 3 is most advantageous for the player, and then the game mode 2 Is advantageous, and the game mode 3 is the most disadvantageous game mode for the player.

  Next, when the game mode is set to “game mode 4”, the big hit probability (the probability of being determined as a big hit in the first special symbol hit / fail judgment and the probability of being determined as the big hit in the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) Is 1/315 in the low probability state (normal state) and 1/42 in the high probability state. The small hit probability is set to 1/90 for both the first special symbol hit / fail judgment and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. The big hit type (big hit type determination judgment) when the big hit in the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is 15R first big hit is 30%, 15R second big hit is 60%, and 2R third big hit is 10%. It is sorted by. In this game mode 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is the same as that of the game mode 2, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/42, and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is the highest among the game modes. Have been. As described later, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs the special symbol hit / fail determination a predetermined number of times in the high probability state, and shifts to the low probability state when it is not determined that the big hit has occurred ( It is a so-called “ST machine”, a game machine called a “probable-variable-number game machine”). Therefore, in the game mode 4, the possibility of the next big hit occurring in the high probability state is the highest as compared with the other game modes. That is, the game mode 4 can be said to be a setting (game mode) in which the probability of ending the high-probability state without generating a big hit is the lowest.

  On the other hand, in the determination of the big hit type, it is set to be disadvantageous compared to other game modes. Specifically, in the big hit type determination when the big hit is determined in the first special symbol hit / fail determination, the ratio of the 15R first big hit that is more likely to be given the privilege (high probability state) is set to be higher than that of other game modes. It is set low, and the ratio of the 15R second big hit that is unlikely to be given a privilege (high probability state) is set higher than other game modes. Thus, in the game mode 4, the possibility that the next big hit will occur in the high probability state is high, but the possibility that the high probability state continues based on the big hit is low.

  Next, when the game mode is set to “game mode 5”, the big hit probability (the probability of being determined as a big hit in the first special symbol hit / fail judgment and the probability of being determined as the big hit in the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) Is 1/315 in the low probability state (normal state) and 1/90 in the high probability state. The small hit probability is set to 1/210 for both the first special symbol hit / fail judgment and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. The big hit type (big hit type determination judgment) when the big hit is determined in the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a rate of 50% for the 15R first big hit, 40% for the 15R second big hit, and 10% for the 2R third big hit. It is sorted by. In this game mode 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is the same as that of the game mode 2, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/90, and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is the lowest among the game modes. Have been. Therefore, in this game mode 5, the possibility of the next big hit occurring in the high-probability state is the lowest in comparison with other game modes, and the high-probability state may end without generating the big hit. This is the highest setting. On the other hand, in the determination of the big hit type, it is advantageously set as compared with other game modes. Specifically, in the big hit type determination when the big hit is determined in the first special symbol hit determination, the ratio of the 15R first big hit that is more likely to be provided with the privilege (high probability state) is set to be higher than in the other game modes. It is set high, and the ratio of the 15R second big hit, which is unlikely to be given a privilege (high probability state), is set lower than in other game modes. Thus, in the game mode 5, the possibility of the next big hit occurring in the high probability state is low, but when the big hit occurs, the possibility of the high probability state continuing based on the big hit is high. ing.

  In this way, a game mode that is disadvantageous or advantageous compared to the other game modes is provided, and the possibility of a big hit in the high probability state (during the privilege granting state) is high. A game mode in which the possibility of continuation (the possibility of giving a privilege again) is low, or a game mode in which the probability of a big hit in the high probability state is low but the high probability state is likely to be continued when a big hit occurs There are various game modes that can respond to various player preferences. As a result, the player who selects the gaming machine expects that the gaming machine is set to his / her favorite gaming mode, and selects a predetermined gaming machine to play the game. In addition, since the small hit probability is different between the game modes 1 to 3, the game mode 4, and the game mode 5, the player is set by counting the number of small hit occurrences during the game. It is possible to guess the game mode to some extent. This allows the player to infer whether or not the gaming machine being played is set to a desired game mode, and to use it as an index for continuing the game. As a result, it is possible to provide a new game interest and enhance the game interest.

  Further, in these game modes, it is also possible to change some or all of aspects such as displayed identification information (effect design), appearing characters, and reach effect (character effect). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment has a main control board 80, a payout control board 110, and other control boards (sub-control board 90, image control board 100) and the like as shown in FIGS. And a power supply board 109 for supplying driving power. The power supply board 109 is provided with a power supply unit 104 for supplying drive power (power supply) to each control board and the like, and a voltage drop monitoring circuit 105 for monitoring a drop in power supply voltage supplied to the power supply board. ing. The power supply board 109 is operated by a game store clerk or the like as a switch for performing a predetermined input operation by performing a predetermined operation (ON by pressing the left side portion, and OFF by pressing the right side portion). A power switch 84 capable of starting or stopping supply of a power supply voltage; a backup area provided in a RAM of the main control unit 80 and a backup area provided in a RAM of the payout control unit 110 by performing a predetermined input operation; A RAM clear switch 83 for erasing and initializing the storage contents of the area. This power supply board 109 is also called “power supply means”. Further, the power supply board 109 may be constituted by one board or may be constituted by a plurality of boards. The same applies to the main control board 80, the payout control board 110, the sub-control board 90, and other control boards.

  When only the power switch 84 is turned on in a state where power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (power OFF state), a power supply voltage is supplied to the power supply board 109 and the power supply board 109 supplies various control boards. The necessary driving power is supplied. If the game state information when the power is turned off (when the power is reduced) is normally stored (stored and held) in the backup area, the game when the power is turned off (when the power is reduced) is based on the game state information. After restoring the state, the game is set to be in a playable state (this is also referred to as "game state information restoring means"). On the other hand, when the power switch 84 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 83 for a predetermined period when the power switch 84 is turned on, the input information (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch from the power supply board 109 is mainly controlled. If there is game state information input to the unit 80 and the payout control unit 110 and stored in the backup area (the main control unit 80 and the payout control unit 110), the stored game state information is deleted and initialized. To make the game playable (this is also referred to as "game state information initializing means"). Thereby, it becomes possible to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an initial state.

  Incidentally, when the stored game state information is erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the stored game state information excluding specific game state information is excluded from the stored game state information (erasing target game state information). ) May be deleted. Game state information that is not erased even by this RAM clear (initialization) operation is referred to as “specific game state information”. The “specific game state information” is, for example, a base value (first base value, second base value), which will be described later. This is game information used when inspecting a gaming machine. Further, other game state information (for example, unpaid prize ball information, state information (probable change, time saving, big hit), game mode information, error information, and the like) are to be erased by RAM clear (initialization) operation. .

  Further, the voltage drop monitoring circuit 105 monitors a voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC24V, DC12V, DC5V, etc.) used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and reduces the monitored voltage value to a predetermined value. Then (when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected), a “power-off signal” indicating this is output to the CPU of the main control unit 80, the CPU of the payout control unit 110, and the like (see FIG. 6). . In addition, the CPU of the main control board 80 and the CPU of the payout control board 110 that have received the power-off signal transmitted from the power supply board 109 store the game state information stored in the respective RAMs in a backup area. Monitor processing of the power interruption. Here, in the RAM of the main control board 80 and the RAM of the payout control board 110, a storage area for storing game state information during a game is also referred to as "game state information storage means", and when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected. The backup area for storing the game state information to be backed up is also referred to as “storage holding means”.

  A part or all of the RAM of the main control board 80 and the RAM of the payout control board 110 is used as a backup area, and is backed up by a backup power supply (backup voltage) of the power supply unit of the power supply board 109. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to the occurrence of a power failure or the operation of turning off the power supply, the RAM is maintained for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply capacitor). The content (game state information) of the backup target (storage storage target) stored in the storage device is stored (storage storage). The game state information includes at least information indicating the set game mode (game mode information) and data indicating the game state (state information), that is, data corresponding to the control state of the main control unit (special symbol status). Flag, a normal symbol status flag, a value of a hold storage counter, a probability change flag, a time saving flag, etc.), data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls (unpaid prize ball information), and the like.

  Then, these game state information are saved (stored and held) in a backup area (backup RAM) where power supply is maintained by a backup power supply. The “data according to the control state of the main control unit” refers to the state after the occurrence of a power failure or the like and when the power supply is started again, the control state (game state) is changed to the power failure or the like. This is data necessary for restoring to the control state (game state) at the time (before the power failure occurs). Although not shown, a backup area is provided in the RAM of the sub-control unit 90 in the same manner as the main control unit 80 and the like, and the game state information ( The number of reserved storages, the prefetch information, the probable change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) may be stored and retained, and the contents of the backup area of the RAM may be preserved for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the main control board 80 is provided (mounted) with a mode setting lock portion 89 for enabling setting change of the above-mentioned game mode. As described above, in order for a game clerk or the like to slide the operation portion 82a of the mode setting switch 82 leftward or rightward (by performing a predetermined input operation) and select an arbitrary game mode, It is necessary to operate the mode setting lock unit 89. As will be described in detail later, at least one operation is to insert a setting key (not shown) into the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 and operate (rotate) the setting key to turn on the mode setting lock portion 89. As one condition, it is possible to change the game mode. The state where the longitudinal direction of the insertion portion 89a is vertical (shown by a solid line in FIG. 6) is set to OFF. When the setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 89a in the OFF state, and the setting key is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees (rotation by a predetermined amount in one direction), the longitudinal direction of the insertion portion 89a becomes horizontal (broken line in FIG. 6). ). This state is the ON state.

  It is possible to change the game mode with at least one condition of being in the ON state. Further, the mode setting lock unit 89 is connected to the CPU of the main control unit 80 on the main control board 80, and the CPU of the main control unit 80 is in the ON state or the OFF state of the mode setting lock unit 89. It is possible to determine (identify) when the mode setting lock unit 89 is turned on, when the mode setting lock unit 89 is turned off, and the like. When the mode setting lock unit 89 is turned on and the setting of the game mode is changed (including the case where the setting is not changed), the setting key is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees (rotated by a predetermined amount in the other direction) to initialize. By returning to the position (OFF position), the setting change operation of the game mode is completed, and the gaming machine is set to a “playable state” in which the player can play the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 89a, the inserted setting key cannot be removed at the ON position, but can be removed only at the OFF position. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game clerk or the like from finishing the setting change operation with the mode setting lock portion 89 being in the OFF state and keeping the gaming machine in the “game-disabled state” as much as possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 80 is sealed (a configuration in which the main control unit 80 cannot be opened without destruction) while being housed in the main control board case. Then, only the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 and its peripheral portion are exposed from the main control board case, so that a setting key can be inserted into the insertion portion 89a from outside the main control board case. I have. That is, the setting of the game mode can be changed while the main control board case is sealed (closed). The setting key can be removed from the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 only at the OFF position, but can be inserted only at the OFF position. That is, the setting key can be inserted into and removed from the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 only at the OFF position.

  Further, the main control board 80 is provided with an information display section 88 (also referred to as a “game information display section”) for displaying predetermined game information at a predetermined timing (for a predetermined period). ing). As shown in FIG. 6, the information display section 88 includes four LED displays (a first information display section 88a, a second information display section 88b, a third information display section 88c, 4 information display sections 88d) are arranged adjacently (mounted) in the horizontal direction. In addition, each LED display has a seven-segment display unit and a dot display unit, and by performing display control by combining these with four LED displays, it is possible to perform a wide variety of displays. It has become. The information display section 88 displays a game mode set by the “determination probability setting means” described above and a base value (first base value and second base value) described later. is there. When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started (when the power is turned on), all the display units (LED displays) constituting the information display unit 88 are displayed in a predetermined display mode for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). For example, all the display units (8 display units of 7 segments + dots) of the four information display units (88a, 88b, 88c, 88d) are displayed in a blinking manner (for example, lighting for 0.5 seconds, 0.5 seconds). For 2 seconds). By confirming the initial display mode when the power is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a failure or defect in the display units (total of 32) constituting the information display unit 88. In addition, in order to facilitate confirmation, it is desirable to perform display control of all display units in the same display mode at substantially the same timing.

  It is assumed that the information display unit 88 is in a display state for displaying some game information at all times after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the game mode is displayed in a game mode display state (“game mode change state”, “game mode confirmation state”) from when the power is turned on until the game is enabled, and the game mode is displayed. When the game can be played, a base display state is displayed in which a base value described later is displayed. That is, it is assumed that no game information is displayed, that is, it is not set to the OFF state. Thereby, it is possible to always display some game information in accordance with the state of the gaming machine, and to quickly and reliably grasp the game information. In addition, by touching the information display unit 88 in a state in which no game information is displayed, it is possible to recognize that the information display unit 88, a control unit for controlling the display, wiring, and the like have some kind of failure or defect. It becomes possible to take quick repairs and countermeasures. In the case where a plurality of stored base values such as the first base value and the second base value (all of them) are out of a reference base value range described in a game machine manual or the like, It can be inquired to the manufacturer or the like that some kind of trouble has occurred in the nail or the game part. In addition, this can reduce the possibility of occurrence of unexpected disadvantage.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include an out sensor 29, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, a specific area sensor. 39a and the general entrance sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as “detection means”.

  The out sensor 29 counts the number (total number) of game balls fired in the game area, and enters all game balls fired in the game area 3, that is, any one of the entrances. Then, all the game balls discharged to the outside of the game machine and the game balls discharged to the outside of the game machine through the out port without entering any of the entrances are detected. Therefore, it is provided below the out port 18 provided at the lowermost part of the game area 3. The out sensor may be provided on the gaming board 2 or on the gaming machine frame 50. The payout is performed based on the total number of outs counted by the out sensor 29 (valid total number of fired balls) and the entrance to the entrances (the first start-up opening 20, the second start-up opening 21, the general entrance 27). Based on the total number of prize balls, a base value to be described later is calculated and displayed on the information display section 88 described above. Here, the counting means for counting the number of outs may be referred to as "first counting means", and the means for counting the number of winning balls may be referred to as "second counting means".

  The first starting port sensor 20a is provided in the first starting port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21 a is provided in the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball passing through the gate 28. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first special winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first special winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 within the second special winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39 among the game balls that have entered the second special winning opening 35. is there. The non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in the non-specific area 49 in the second special winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 49 among the game balls that have entered the second special winning opening 35. Is what you do. The general entrance sensor 27a is provided in each of the general entrances 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general entrance 27.

  As the solenoids, a second starting port solenoid 24, a first big winning port solenoid 33, a second big winning port solenoid 38, and a movable piece solenoid 151 are connected. These various solenoids are also called “driving means”. The second starting opening solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22, and the first winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first winning device 31. is there. Further, the second big winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening and closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36, and the movable piece solenoid 151 is for driving the movable piece 150 of the second big winning device 36. is there. Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, a second special symbol reservation display 43b, The hold display 44, the round display 45, the game state display 46, the launch direction display 47, and the hit display 48 are connected. That is, the display control of the main display 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 stores a payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 (a prepaid card (game value storage medium) installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and inserted). And a launching device 112 via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a "launch control unit"). The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM storing a program and the like for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. It drives to pay out prize balls or pays out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the firing device 112, the touch sensor 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 rotates the firing handle 60. Detect the amount. Then, the driving of the firing motor 113 is controlled so that the game ball is fired with the strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a non-illustrated unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) as communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 5, on the sub-control board 90, an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM storing a program for controlling a game effect as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the program stored in the ROM. I have. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from another substrate or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be provided externally.

  The image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 displays an image on the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The display control of the device 7, the effect display 102, the first effect suspension display 103a, and the second effect suspension display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, and the like (including effect designs, reserve designs, and the like) And image data such as a background image. The CPU of the image control board 100 reads out image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The effect indicator 102 is composed of two LEDs, performs a fluctuation display and a stop display in accordance with the fluctuation display and the stop display of the effect symbol 8, and performs the effect symbol by turning on / off the two LEDs or a combination of colors. 8 is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the display result (the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment). Similarly, the first effect on-hold display 103a and the second effect on-hold display 103b also include two LEDs. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or by combining the colors, the first effect holding display 103a is displayed on the first effect holding display area 43 and the number of holdings displayed in the first effect holding display area 9c. The display control is performed in a display mode indicating the same number of held items as the number of held items. Further, the display of the second effect holding display 103b is controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holdings as the number of holdings displayed on the second effect holding display area 9d and the number of holdings displayed on the second special figure holding display 43b. You. This means that the character design is displayed on substantially the entirety of the display screen 7a (effect design display section), or the movable decoration member 14 is operated to substantially effect the entire effect design display area 7b (effect design display section) of the display screen 7a. Such a display is provided because a part or all of the effect design, the first effect suspension display unit, or the second effect suspension display unit may be invisible due to covering. . Note that a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sound, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute the audio control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and the ROM may store acoustic data. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on a command received from the main control board 80 and emits light pattern data (light / light off, light color, etc., which determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5). , Lamp data) is determined from data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80, and 14 and 17 are operated. The movable decorative member 14 (also referred to as a “panel movable portion” or a “first movable member”) is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10. In addition, the movable decoration member 17 (also referred to as a “frame movable portion” or “second movable member”) is provided by the effect control microcomputer 91 by operation pattern data for operating the movable decoration members 14 and 17 in a predetermined operation mode. (Also referred to as “drive data”) is determined from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and the operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data on the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  An origin sensor 14b that detects that the movable decorative member 14 is at the start position (initial state), that is, at the origin, is connected to the sub-control board 90. The origin sensor 14b constitutes a movable decoration unit together with the movable decoration member 14, and is located behind the decoration member 13 (on the back side), as shown by the broken line in FIG. Sometimes it is provided so that its presence can be detected. When the movable decorative member 14 is at the start position, a signal (origin sensor signal) input from the origin sensor 14b to the sub-control board 90 is turned on. When the movable decorative member 14 is not at the start position, the origin sensor signal is turned off. Become. The origin sensor 14b may be any sensor that can detect that the detection object has approached in a non-contact manner, and may use a photo sensor, a proximity sensor, or the like.

  An origin sensor 17b that detects that the movable decorative member 17 is at the start position (initial state), that is, at the origin, is connected to the sub-control board 90. The origin sensor 17b forms a movable decoration unit together with the movable decoration member 17, and can detect the presence of the movable decoration member 17 when the movable decoration member 17 is at the start point position inside (on the back side). It is provided so that When the movable decorative member 17 is at the start position, a signal (origin sensor signal) input from the origin sensor 14b to the sub-control board 90 is turned on. When the movable decorative member 17 is not at the start position, the origin sensor signal is turned off. Become. The origin sensor 17b may be any sensor that can detect that a detection object has approached in a non-contact manner, and may use a photo sensor, a proximity sensor, or the like.

  The sub-control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.) and a second effect button detection switch 63c. The two effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

  Next, control related to the determination of success / failure in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, there are “big hit”, “small hit”, and “miss”. At the time of "big hit", "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In the case of “missing”, “missing symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a “special game” in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed is executed. . A special game executed as a big hit is called "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called "small hit game". The types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed may be "big hit", "small hit", and "missing", and one or more special symbols may be provided.

  There are multiple types of jackpots. As shown in FIG. 7, the types of hits include “15R (round) first big hit”, “15R second big hit”, “2R third big hit”, and “15R fourth big hit”. The “15R first big hit” and “15R fourth big hit” have the number of open times (number of rounds) of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 or the second special winning opening 35) of 15 times. In the second round, this is a big hit in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened in such a manner that the game ball can pass (easily) to the specific area 39 (also simply referred to as “V”). A round aiming at the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 (a predetermined privilege is given when the game ball passes through the specific area) can be referred to as a V round, a chance round, or a challenge round. Note that the V round (specific round) is a round for operating the movable piece 150, and the rounds (non-specific rounds) other than the V round do not operate the movable piece 150. In other words, even in the round in which the second special winning opening 35 is opened, in a round other than the V round, the movable piece 150 does not operate, and the specific area 39 is always in the closed state. Even if the ball enters the second special winning opening 35, the game ball is not guided to the specific area 39. That is, rounds other than the V round can be said to be “rounds in which a game ball cannot pass through a specific area”.

  The “15R second big hit” is one round which is the chance round described above, although the number of times (number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) is 15 times. The opening time of the first and second rounds is set to be extremely short (open / close for a moment), making it difficult to enter the second special winning opening 35 and making it difficult for game balls to pass to the specific area 39 (as impossible). It is a big hit. In other words, it can be said that the “15R second big hit” is a big hit that does not open the second big winning device 36 in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 (easy). The “2R third big hit” is such that the number of open times (the number of rounds) of the big winning opening (the second big winning opening 35) is two times, and in the first and second rounds of the V round, respectively, it is not so long. Although there is no game ball, the game ball to the second special winning opening 35 is opened in a form that allows the ball to enter. Specifically, in each round, the release of “0.9 s” is performed once. In other words, the 2R third big hit is a big hit that opens the second big winning device 36 in such a manner that the game ball can pass to the specific area 39. However, since the opening time of the second special winning opening 35 is 1.8 seconds even if the first round and the second round are combined, the game ball can pass to the specific area 39, but the 15R first big hit The possibility that the game ball will pass to the specific area 39 is lower.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 during the big hit game, the game state after the end of the big hit game is shifted to a high probability state described later. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is the 15R first big hit, the 2R third big hit, or the 15R fourth big hit, the possibility of the game ball passing to the specific area is determined as (15R second big hit). Since the first round and the second round V are executed in a relatively high manner (compared with each other), by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 during the execution of the big hit game, the game state after the big hit game Can be shifted to a high probability state. On the other hand, in the case of the 15R second big hit, since the opening time of the first round and the second chance round is 0.1 second each, the second big winning opening is performed in the V round. Since it is very difficult to enter the game ball into the specific area 39 during execution of the big hit game, the game ball cannot pass through to the specific area 39, and the game state after the big hit game is a normal state described later. (Low probability state) is very likely (it may be said to be a low probability state).

  On the other hand, in the opening pattern of the small hit game executed when the small hit occurs, the opening operation of opening the second big winning opening 35 for 0.9 seconds is performed twice (the ball can be entered). ) The open pattern of the small hit game is apparently the same open pattern as the 2R third big hit game, and is an open pattern in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the small hit game or the 2R big hit game. . Therefore, it is not possible to discriminate between the small hit game and the 2R big hit game to be executed simply by looking at these open patterns. That is, when a small hit occurs, the second big winning device 36 is opened twice so that a game ball can enter the second big winning opening 35. However, during the execution of the small hit game, the movable piece 150 does not move, so that the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 even if the game ball enters the second big winning opening 35. Even if a game ball passes to the specific area 39 for some reason, in a round other than the V round, the invalid period in which the passing of the specific area 39 (detection by the specific area sensor 39a) is not treated as valid. Therefore, no privilege is given based on the passage through the specific area 39.

  Therefore, the game state after the execution of the small hit game is not changed from before the execution of the small hit game. Therefore, if the game state before the execution of the small hit game is the normal state (low probability state), the game state after the execution of the small hit game is also the normal state. From the viewpoint of the player, it is difficult to distinguish the 2R third big hit and the small hit from the opening pattern of the big winning opening (the second big winning opening 35). In other words, it is difficult for the player to recognize from the opening pattern of the special winning opening whether the result of the special symbol hit determination is a 2R third big hit or a small hit. In addition, during the performance of the big hit game related to the 2R third big hit and the small hit game related to the small hit, and during the subsequent variation display of the effect symbol, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the two. Thus, a common effect (effect mode) can be executed. Therefore, even if the game ball is passed to the specific area 39 during the special game as the 2R third big hit, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the subsequent game state has shifted to the high probability state. It should be noted that the operation mode of the movable piece 150 inside the second special winning opening 35 and whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area are also configured such that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. As a result, in the case of a small hit, and in the case of a 2R third big hit, a game while having an expectation that after the end of the hit game (small hit game or big hit game) may be in a high probability state. Can be progressed, and it is possible to enhance game entertainment. It should be noted that, in the case of a small hit, the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times of opening.

  More specifically, the opening pattern of the special winning opening when each of the big hits and the small hits in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is as shown in FIG. That is, a 15R first big hit (when the 15R first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and a 15R fourth big hit (when the second special symbol display 41b is displayed) When the 15R fourth big hit symbol is stopped and displayed), the second big winning opening 35 is opened up to 28 seconds from 1R to 2R, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened up to 28 seconds from 3R to 15R. . In this hit, since the opening time of the second special winning opening 35 at the 1R and the 2R is 28 seconds each, it is easy to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 during the round.

  When the 15R second big hit is reached (when the 15R second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the second big winning opening 35 is set to a maximum of 0.1 from 1R to 2R. The first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds from 3R to 15R. In this hit, since the opening time of the second special winning opening 35 at the 1R and the 2R is a very short time of 0.1 second at the maximum (open / close for a moment), the game ball is moved to the specific area 39 during the round. It is almost impossible to pass through. That is, the opening pattern for the 15R second big hit differs from the opening pattern for the 15R first big hit in the opening mode of the first round and the second round. In other words, in the 15R first big hit, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for 28 seconds in the first and second rounds of the V round, so that the game ball easily enters the second big winning opening 35. Since the movable piece 150 is also operating, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 passes through the specific area 39 with a high possibility. On the other hand, in the 15R second big hit, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 second in the first and second rounds. Therefore, it is very difficult for a game ball to enter the second special winning opening 35. Therefore, during execution of the 15R second big hit, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 is considerably lower than that of the 15R first big hit. Further, since the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 is infinitely close to 0, it may be said that the game ball does not pass.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, when the 2R third big hit is reached (when the 2R third big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the second and the 3R second hits the second big hit. The large winning openings 35 are respectively opened for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. In this hit, since the opening time of the second special winning opening 35, which is the sum of the first and second rounds, is a maximum of 1.8 seconds, a game ball enters the second special winning opening 35 during any round. As a result, it is possible to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 which is opened by the operation of the movable piece 150. In the present pachinko gaming machine 1, one game ball is fired in about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, if the opening time of the second special winning opening 35 is 1.8 seconds, it is sufficiently possible to allow game balls to enter the second special winning opening 35. Also, in the 2R third big hit, since the total opening time of the second big winning opening is as short as 1.8 seconds, many prize balls (game profits) cannot be expected like other 15R big hits. In other words, it is a big hit where almost no prize ball can be obtained compared to other big hits (15R big hit).

  In addition, the first small hit (when the first small hit symbol 41a is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), and the second small hit (the second special symbol display 41b) (When the second small hit symbol is stopped and displayed), the opening is performed twice at the second big winning opening 35 for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. That is, the same big winning prize opening that is opened in the big hit game of the 2R third big hit is opened in the same opening pattern. The closing time between the first opening and the second opening in the small hitting game, and the interval time of the first round and the second round in the 2R third big hit are set to the same time. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the big hit game related to the 2R third big hit and the small hit game related to the small hit. In addition, even in this small hit, since the total opening time of the second special winning opening 35 is a maximum of 1.8 seconds, game balls can enter the second special winning opening 35. However, as described above, since the small hit game does not have the V round, the movable piece 150 does not operate, and the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39. In addition, since this small hit has a short total opening time of the large winning opening of 1.8 seconds, it is not possible to expect as many prize balls as in the 2R third big hit. That is, the small hit has almost no benefit for the player (only the prize ball by entering the ball) in terms of the transition of the game state and the prize ball. That is, in the present embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second special winning opening 35, a first opening pattern in which a game ball can pass (easily pass) the specific area 39 (15 first big hit, 15R fourth big hit), A second opening pattern in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific area 39 (impossible to pass) (15R second big hit); 3 open patterns and (2R third big hit, small hit).

  In addition, the distribution probability to each big hit in the determination of the success or failure of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set corresponding to each game mode as described above. In addition, the big hits in the hit determination of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are all 15R fourth big hits. That is, in the case where a big hit is determined by a hit / fail judgment based on the ball entry into the second starting port 21 in which the ball entry becomes easy due to the operation of the opening extension function described later (the occurrence of the high base state), the 15R fourth big hit must be made. It becomes. In this way, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second starting port 21, rather than a big hit in the hit / non-permission judgment (big hit lottery of the first special symbol) performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 20. It is set so that a player who wins the game in the hit determination (a jackpot lottery of the second special symbol) performed by entering the game ball is more likely to be advantageous to the player. That is, the player plays the game expecting the ball to enter the second starting port 21. This is particularly noticeable during the operation of the opening extension function in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 increases.

  Here, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is made based on a "special symbol hit / fail judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / fail judgment information ")", and the big hit is achieved. The determination of the type of the jackpot in the case is performed based on “the random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as“ symbol for determining symbols ”or“ information for determining symbols ”)”. Each of the special symbol win / fail determination and the jackpot type determination determination is also referred to as “win / fail determination (judgment)”, and may be generally referred to as “win / fail determination (judgment)”. As shown in FIG. 8A, the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The big hit type determining random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. In addition, the random number (acquired information) obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 includes "reach random number" in addition to the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number. (Also referred to as “reach information”) ”and“ variation pattern random numbers (also referred to as “variation pattern information”) ”.

  The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not to generate a reach in a game effect (effect symbol game effect) that uses the effect symbol when the result of the special symbol hit determination is out of order. The reach is, for example, a state in which two left and right effect symbols 8R and 8L are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the same symbol, and the remaining one of the medium effect symbols 8C is changing (“7 ↓ 7”). Status). Then, if the middle effect symbol 8C during the change stops at the same symbol as the stopped effect symbols 8R and 8L, the three effect symbols stop at the same symbol, which is a hit. In addition, the stop (temporary stop) of the effect symbol in this case includes a display (fluctuation fluctuation) in which the effect symbol slightly shakes in the effect symbol display area 7b. The reach random number takes a value in a range from 0 to 126.

  The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern including a variation time. The variation pattern random number takes a value in a range from 0 to 198. In addition, the random numbers acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 include a random number for determining whether or not the symbol is correct as shown in FIG. The random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is accepted is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol lottery). Normally, the symbol random number takes a value in a range of 0 to 240.

  Next, a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a plurality of gaming states by a combination in which the probability variation function, the variation time reduction function, and the opening extension function of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are activated or deactivated. . The state where the probability variation function is activated for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is called "high probability state", and the state where it is not activated is "normal state (also called" low probability state "). " In the high probability state, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol win / fail determination (the first special symbol win / fail determination and the second special symbol win / fail determination) is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the hit determination is performed using the big hit determination table for the normal state, but in the high probability state, the big hit determination table for the high probability state has a large number of the special symbol hit determination random numbers determined to be the big hit. To judge whether it is correct or not (see FIG. 9A). That is, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability of the special symbol variation display being a big hit (the stopped symbol is a big hit symbol) is higher than when the special symbol is not activated.

  Further, the state in which the variation time reducing function is activated for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as “time reduction state”, and the state in which the function is not activated is referred to as “non-time reduction state”. In the time reduction state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of the confirmation display) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time reduction state. That is, in the time reduction state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table determined so that the fluctuation pattern having the shorter fluctuation time is selected more than in the non-time reduction state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation is increased, and an effective ball entering the starting port (a ball that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with a smooth progress of the game.

  The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may operate at the same time, or only one of them may operate. Then, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function for the ordinary symbol operate in synchronization with the variation time reduction function of the special symbol. That is, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function of the normal symbol operate in the special symbol time reduction state, and do not operate in the non-hour reduction state. Therefore, in the time reduction state, the hit probability in the normal symbol success / failure determination is higher than in the non-time reduction state. In other words, a normal symbol hit determination table (normal symbol determination) is performed by using a normal symbol hit determination table in which the value of a normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger than a normal symbol hit determination table used in a non-time saving state. (See FIG. 8D). That is, when the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol display 42 is activated, the probability of the result of the variation display of the ordinary symbol being a hit (the stopped symbol is a normal hit symbol) is higher than when the probability variation function is not activated. .

  In addition, in the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the symbol is usually shorter than in the non-time reduction state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the symbol is normally 30 seconds in the non-time reduction state, but is 1 second in the time reduction state (see FIG. 8E). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state. That is, the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. Specifically, when the result of the ordinary symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit in the non-time saving state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation once for 0.2 seconds, during which the second starting port is in the open state. Become. In addition, when the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit in the time saving state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 2.0 seconds three times.

  Under the condition that the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function for the ordinary symbol, and the opening time extension function and the opening frequency increasing function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, compared to the case where these functions are not activated. As a result, the second starting port 21 is frequently opened, and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as a “high frequency state”). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launch balls (ratio of award balls), is increased. Therefore, a state in which these functions are operating is referred to as a “high base state”, and a state in which these functions are not operating is referred to as a “low base state”. In the high base state, a big hit can be aimed at without greatly reducing the number of game balls on hand. In this embodiment, the base value calculated in the low base state is displayed on the information display unit 88. That is, the number of outs (the number of shot balls) and the number of award balls in the high base state and the big hit game state are not reflected in the base value displayed on the information display unit 88.

  The high base state (high frequency state) may not be the state in which all the functions described above operate. That is, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function for the normal symbol, and the activation of at least one of the opening time extension function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22 are activated when the function is not activated. It is only necessary that the second starting port is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the special symbol time reduction state. The function of generating such a high base state can also be referred to as a “high base generation function”.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the game state after the special game in the case of the 15R first big hit is that the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. , The special symbol high probability state, the special symbol time saving state, and the high base state. This game state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate high base state”. The high-accuracy-high base state ends when a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays are executed, or when a big hit is played and a big hit game is executed.

  Also, the game state after the special game in the case of the 15R second big hit is extremely difficult to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game, so the special symbol normal state and the special symbol time reduction state, And it becomes a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low-probability and high-base state (also referred to as“ time saving mode ”)”. The low-probability-high base state ends when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of a special symbol is displayed or a big hit is won and the big hit game is executed. Although the possibility is extremely low, if the vehicle passes through the specific area 39, the state becomes the “high-accuracy-high-base state”. In the normal state (low-probability low-base state), the game state after the special game in the case of the 2R third big hit is the special symbol high if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. It becomes a probabilistic state, a non-saving time state of a special symbol, and a low base state. This game state is particularly referred to as a “high-accuracy low-base state”. The high-accuracy low-base state ends when a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays are executed or a big hit is executed and a big hit game is executed.

  The high-probability low-base state is a state in which the high-probability state is hidden, that is, a state in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the high-probability state. That is, the high-accuracy low-base state is a so-called “latent probability change state”. In addition, a state in which whether the current big hit probability of the special symbol determination is low or high (low-probability state or high-probability state) is not called a “probability non-report state”. On the other hand, the above-mentioned high-probability high-base state is a state that is clear to the player as a high-probability state. That is, the high-probability high-base state is a so-called “probable change game state (also referred to as“ probable change mode ”)”. In the high base state, the game state after the special game in the case of the 2R third big hit is the special symbol high probability state and the special symbol if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. It becomes a time saving state and a high base state. That is, the time saving function and the base state of the special symbol are the same as the state before the execution of the special game. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after power-on is a normal state of a special symbol, a non-time saving state of the special symbol, and a low base state. This game state is particularly referred to as a “low-probability low-base state”.

  In a high base state such as a high-probability base state or a low-probability base state, a game can be advantageously progressed when the game ball enters the right game area 3B by right-handing. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is more easily opened than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. Because it is. Therefore, a right-handed shot is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21 while allowing the game ball to pass through the gate 28, which is usually a trigger for determining whether or not the symbol is correct. As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is appropriate) than when the player hits left. In this state, the lighting of the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing is to be performed to the right game area.

  On the other hand, in the low base state such as the high-accuracy low-base state and the low-accuracy low-base state, it is possible to advantageously advance the game by causing the game ball to enter the left game area 3A by left-handing. Further, in the low base state, the second starting port 21 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to enter the first starting port 20 than to enter the second starting port 21. Because it is. Therefore, a left hit is performed so that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting balls (opportunity for determining whether or not a special symbol is appropriate) than when the player hits right. In this state, the launch direction indicator 47 is controlled to be turned on (display controlled) in a predetermined manner, and notifies that the launch direction should be launched to the left game area. Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs “yz”, and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the LED should be fired to the left game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: turn off, Δ: turn on). it can. Also, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as “y ■ z ■” (for example, □: turned off, Δ: turned on). it can.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 12 from the ROM of the main control board 80. . As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, first, an initialization process described later is performed (S101). In the initial setting process (S101), for example, in addition to processes such as a game state restoration process and a game state initialization process, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO , PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller), resetting various flags, statuses, and counters. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. Note that the initial setting process (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter (after starting the game). In the examples and drawings, the ordinary symbol is "Private", the special symbol is "Special", the first special symbol is "Special symbol 1", "First special symbol", and the second special symbol is "Special symbol 2". "" And "second special map".

  After the initial setting process (S101), a mode setting process (S106) described later is executed. In this mode setting process, it is determined whether a predetermined change condition (change timing, change operation) described later is satisfied, and if the change condition is satisfied, the setting change to the game mode selected by the mode setting switch 82 is performed. This is a process that can be performed. In this mode setting processing, it is determined whether or not predetermined check conditions (check timing, check operation) described later are satisfied. If the check conditions are satisfied, the set game mode is displayed in the information display section 88. A mode confirmation process for displaying and confirming the information is performed. This mode setting process (S106) is executed once upon power-on, as in the initial setting process (S101), upon power-on, and is not executed thereafter (after the game starts).

After the mode setting process (S106), a power-on notification process (S107) described later is executed. This power-on notification process is a process of issuing a notification in a different manner depending on whether or not the backed up game state information has been initialized with the power-on and whether or not the game mode setting has been changed. This power-on notification processing (S107) is executed once with power-on after power-on, as in the initial setting processing (S101) and the mode setting processing (S106), and thereafter (after the game starts). Is not executed.

  Further, following the power-on notification processing (S107), it is determined whether or not the initialization flag is ON (S108), and the initialization flag is ON, that is, the initialization flag is stored in the RAM in the initialization processing (S101) described later. When it is determined that the stored game information has been initialized (erased) (RAM clear processing has been performed) (YES in S108), the initialization flag is turned off (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. On the other hand, if it is determined in S108 that the initialization flag is not ON, that is, that the RAM clear processing has not been performed (NO in S108), the initialization flag is already OFF, and thus the processing directly proceeds to S110. In S110, the interruption is permitted (S110), and the process proceeds to S102. As a result, execution of the interrupt process (S105) becomes possible, and when the gaming machine is in the game mode change state or the game mode confirmation state, the state ends, and the game machine shifts to the game possible state. Accordingly, the display content of the information display unit 88 described later is switched from the information indicating the game mode to the information indicating the base value. In S102, the interruption is prohibited (S102), and the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) is executed. In the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103), the value of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 is incremented by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) ends, an interrupt is permitted (S104). While the interruption is permitted, the execution of the interruption processing (S105) becomes possible. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of, for example, 4 ms. After the interruption process (S105) is completed, before the next interruption process (S105) is started, the updating process of the various counter values by the regular symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) is repeated. Be executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Initial setting process]
Next, the initial setting process (S101) will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the initial setting process (S101), first, interrupts are prohibited (S3001), and a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack area for securing a stack area is performed (S3002). Next, an interrupt setting process for setting an interrupt mode (S3003) and a built-in device setting process for setting various built-in devices such as a CTC (counter timer circuit) and a PIO (peripheral device interface) are performed (S3004). Move to the processing of.

  In S3006, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not a pressing operation has been performed (S3006). If it is determined in S3006 that the RAM clear switch is OFF, that is, it is determined that the power has been turned on without operating the RAM clear switch (NO in S3006), then it is determined whether the power-off flag is normally ON. Is determined (S3007). If it is determined in S3007 that the power-off flag is ON (YES in S3007), RAM check data is calculated for the backup areas (161, 162) in the RAM (S3008). The check data of the RAM is calculated by adding the state of the input port, the value of the power-off flag and the contents of the RAM area protected at the time of power-off for each byte, and then inverting all the bits.

  Next, the check data calculated in S3008 is compared with the check data stored in the RAM stored in the RAM when the power is turned off (also referred to as “when power is cut off”) to determine whether the check data is normal (S3009). . If it is determined in S3009 that the calculated check data in the RAM matches the stored check data (YES in S3009), it is determined that the backup data stored in the backup areas (161, 162) of the RAM when the power is turned off is normal. Initialize (clear to 0) areas other than the RAM area (backup area etc.) used when performing power restoration processing, and play state (probability state, time saving state, number of suspensions, game The mode, special symbol status, ordinary symbol status, etc.) are restored (restored) (S3010). Next, the power-off flag is turned off (S3011), and a “power-on command at power-off recovery (power-off recovery command)” is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 (S3012), and the process ends. The “power-off recovery command” includes a set value corresponding to a game state (low-probability state, high-probability state, whether or not during working hours, status information, and the like), and a sub-control board based on the set value. The control state of 90 also returns to the control state at the time of power failure occurrence (before power failure occurs).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3006 that the RAM clear switch is ON, that is, it is determined that the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is operated (the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear) (YES in S3006), Alternatively, in S3007, when it is determined that the power-off flag is not normally ON (that is, OFF or abnormal) (NO in S3007), or when it is determined that the check data in the RAM does not match (S3009) In (NO), the entire area (including the backup area) of the RAM (the RAM of the main control unit 80 and the payout control unit) is initialized (S3013), and is different from the above-mentioned “power-on command at power-off recovery”. A “power-on command for clearing RAM (RAM clear command)” is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 (S3014), the initialization flag is turned on (S3015), and the process is performed. Finish.

  By performing this processing, when the power switch is OFF, the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear switch is being operated (turned on), and the RAM clear switch is turned on until a predetermined time, a RAM clear signal is output. Is transmitted to the main control board 80, and the entire RAM area including the backup area is initialized. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without performing such an operation, the game state (control state) at the time of power interruption is restored based on the game state information (including the game mode) stored in the backup area. Will be done. As a result, even when an unexpected power outage or the like occurs, it is possible to restore the game state (control state) during the game when the power supply is restarted, thereby preventing the player from being injured unexpectedly. It is possible to do.

[Mode setting processing]
Next, the mode setting process (S106) will be described with reference to FIG. In the mode setting process, the game mode before the power is turned off is changed and set to another game mode selected from the five types of the game modes 1 to 5 described above (game mode change state). This is processing for confirming the set game mode (game mode confirmation state). In this mode setting process, a specific change condition is set, and unless the change condition is satisfied, the game mode setting cannot be changed even if the mode setting switch 82 is operated. Similarly, a specific confirmation condition is set, and unless the confirmation condition is satisfied, the setting of the game mode cannot be confirmed.

  Specifically, in the mode setting process (S106), first, the initialization maintaining flag, the setting change flag, and the recovery flag are turned off (S3120), and the process proceeds to S3101. According to this processing, if the initialization maintenance flag, the setting change flag, and the recovery flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and if they are already OFF, they remain OFF, and all of them are turned OFF. Then, only one of the flags is turned on depending on the power-on mode by the processing described later. In S3101, it is determined whether the initialization flag is ON, that is, whether the RAM is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch when the power is turned on (S3101). If it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is ON (YES in S3101), then it is determined whether the mode setting key (mode setting lock) is ON (S3102). That is, it is determined whether the setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 and the setting key is operated from the OFF position to the ON position. When the mode setting key is not ON, that is, when the setting key is not operated (not inserted) and the mode setting lock unit 89 is determined to be in the OFF state (NO in S3102), the backed up game state The information is erased (initialized) and the initialization maintenance flag (also referred to as “first activation flag”) indicating that the setting of the game mode has not been changed (the setting has been maintained) is turned on (S3111), Finish the process.

  As described above, even if the backup area is initialized when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, if the mode setting lock unit 89 is not turned on at the time of turning on the power, the game mode is simply initialized. Cannot be changed. Next, in S3102, when it is determined that the mode setting key is ON, that is, the setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89, and the setting key is operated from the OFF position to the ON position. (YES in S3102), the process proceeds to S3103. This is because when the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89, and the power switch 84 is pressed while the RAM clear switch 83 is pressed while the setting key is operated to the ON position. This shows a state in which the switch is turned on. That is, this means that both the RAM clear switch 83 and the mode setting lock unit 89 are turned on when the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, this is the game mode change condition. As a result, the gaming machine enters a “game mode change state” in which the game mode setting can be changed to an arbitrary setting.

  In S3103, it is determined whether or not the mode change flag indicating the "game mode change state" is ON (S3103). If it is determined that the mode change flag is not ON (NO in S3103), the mode change flag is set. By turning it on, the game mode is changed to the “game mode change state” (S3104), and the processing shifts to S3105. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3103 that the mode change flag is already ON (YES in S3103), the process shifts to S3105. In S3105, the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 that allows the player to arbitrarily select an arbitrary game mode is read (S3105), and the game mode corresponding to the read selection information is set (S3106). The game mode set in S3106 is displayed on the information display section 88 (S3107), and the process shifts to S3108. The display mode of the information display unit 88 when displaying the game mode is as follows. The first information display unit 88a, the second information display unit 88b, and the third information display unit 88c are all in the central part of the seven segments. Only the segments are turned on, and the remaining segments and the dot display are turned off. Then, a display indicating the game mode is performed using the fourth information display section 88d at the right end. The display mode is any one of [1], [2], [3], [4], and [5], and slides the operation unit 82a of the mode setting switch 82 in the “game mode change state”. Every time, information ([1], [2], [3], [4] or [5]) indicating the corresponding game mode is displayed. Further, the dot display section is turned off. For example, when the game mode 3 is selected, the information display section displays “−−− 3”.

  In S3108, whether the mode setting key is OFF, that is, the setting key inserted into the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 is turned from the ON position to the OFF position, and the mode setting lock portion 89 is turned OFF. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S3108). That is, in the "game mode change state", it is determined whether or not an operation of changing the setting to an arbitrary game mode and an operation of returning the setting key to the OFF position (an operation of ending the "game mode change state") are performed. If it is determined in S3108 that the mode setting key is OFF, that is, the setting key is still at the OFF position (NO in S3108), the process returns to S3103, and the processing up to S3108 is performed again. As a result, the game clerk or the like maintains the “game mode change state” until the set key is operated to the OFF position (by keeping the ON position), and reliably sets the game mode to an arbitrary (intended) game mode. (Change the settings).

  Then, when the setting to an arbitrary (intended) game mode is completed, the setting key is operated (returned) to the OFF position to end the “game mode change state”. Once the "game mode change state" is completed, the power is turned off again and the game machine is set to the "game mode change state" unless the power is turned on again in a manner satisfying a specific change condition. It is not possible. In addition, the setting key is operated (returned) to the OFF position to end the "game mode change state", but instead, the setting key is operated to the OFF position (returned) to change the setting key. The “game mode change state” may be ended by pulling out from the insertion section 89a. Further, even when the game mode is changed to the "game mode change state", the "game mode change state" may be ended without changing the game mode.

  If it is determined in S3108 that the mode setting key is OFF, that is, the setting key has been operated to the OFF position (YES in S3108), the mode change flag is turned OFF and the "game mode change state" is ended (S3109). Then, the backed up game state information is erased (initialized) and a setting change flag (also referred to as a "second start flag") indicating that the setting of the game mode has been changed is turned on (S3110), and the process is terminated. . In the present embodiment, the setting change flag is turned on even if the game mode is not changed in the "game mode change state". The game mode that has been set is stored (not deleted), and if the game mode is not changed in the “game mode change state”, the initialization maintaining flag may be set to ON.

  If it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is not ON, that is, it is determined that the backed up game state information has not been erased (initialized) (NO in S3101), it is determined that the game mode information does not satisfy the specific change condition and the "game mode change" is not performed. The state shifts to the process of S3112 without setting the state. In S3112, the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is read (S3112), and the selection information of the read mode selection switch and the game (currently being set) stored in the RAM by the above-described initialization processing restoring processing. It is determined whether or not the mode matches (S3114). Next, in S3114, when it is determined that the result of the comparison determination in S3113 matches (YES in S3114), the process proceeds to S3116. In S3116, it is determined whether or not error notification is being performed (S3116). If it is determined that error notification is not being performed (NO in S3116), the backed up game state information is restored (not initialized) (and the game mode is set). Is turned on (S3118), a mode confirmation process described later is performed (S3119), and the process ends.

  That is, when the power is turned on, the game state (control state) at the time of power interruption is restored based on the game state information stored and held in the backup area without performing a predetermined operation on the RAM clear switch, When the setting state of the mode setting switch is not changed, the processing order is as described above, and the game can be started without changing the game mode (without passing through the “game mode change state”).

  If it is determined in S3114 that the comparison determination results in S3113 do not match (NO in S3114), error notification is performed (S3115), and the process returns to S3114. Then, the processing of S3114 and S3115 is repeated until error determination is made in S3114, and error notification is continued. Until it is determined in S3114 that there is a match, error notification is continued and the game does not shift to a startable state. That is, the game is stopped. As described above, when it is determined in S3114 that they do not match, the game state (control state) at the time of power interruption is restored based on the game state information stored and held in the backup area (the game state restoration processing in the initial setting processing). Is performed), and may occur when the setting state of the mode setting switch is changed (when the mode setting switch 82 is operated in spite of not being in the “game mode changing state”). In the error notification, an error display indicating that the mode setting switch has been illegally operated is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or a predetermined error is displayed on the panel lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, or the speaker 67. It is possible to make a notification. In the error notification, both the setting of the correct game mode and the game mode selected by the mode setting switch may be indicated by some kind of display. As a result, the setting position of the game mode by the mode setting switch 82 can be quickly corrected, and the error notification can be ended.

  On the other hand, during the execution of the error notification, the setting state of the mode setting switch 82 is returned to the position (that is, the state at the time of power interruption) corresponding to the gaming mode (backed-up gaming mode setting) set in the gaming machine. Thus, it is determined that they match in S3114 (YES in S3114), and the process can proceed to S3116. In S3116, it is determined whether or not error notification is being performed (S3116). If it is determined that error notification is being performed (YES in S3116), the error notification is terminated (S3117), and the process shifts to S3118. As a result, a state in which a game can be started ("a game possible state") is established. As another method of ending (releasing) the error notification, there is a method of turning off the power switch once and performing a predetermined input operation on the RAM clear switch to turn on the power switch. At this time, regardless of whether or not the setting key is operated, the error notification is ended by initializing the error information. When the power switch is turned off and the setting key is turned to the ON position, the RAM clear switch is operated and the power switch is turned on, the error notification is terminated and the game mode is set to the mode setting. It is possible to change to the game mode corresponding to the selection information of the switch 82. Even with such a method, it is possible to end the error notification (error processing).

  In a pachinko game machine having a game mode setting change function as in the present embodiment, when a game machine frame is opened for maintenance or the like, a game clerk or a maintenance company or the like inadvertently (erroneously) uses the mode setting switch 82. And the user may unintentionally operate the mode setting switch. In such a case, it is possible to return to the original set position by noticing that the operation was performed erroneously, but there are also cases where the user does not notice that the operation was performed erroneously. Further, there is a possibility that someone may illegally open the gaming machine frame and operate the mode setting switch 82. As a result, the game mode (selection information) indicated (selected) by the mode setting switch may be changed. In such a case, the game mode can be changed without limitation (even after the start of the game), or the game mode can be changed by reading the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 without any particular limitation when the power is turned on. Then, the game mode may be changed to a game mode that is not intended by the game store, or a game mode that is advantageous to the unauthorized player may be changed, so that the game store or the like may suffer an unexpected disadvantage. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a specific change condition is set, and unless the change condition is satisfied, the mode setting switch 82 is operated to move the operation unit 82a to a position where an arbitrary game mode can be set. Even if it moves, it does not change to the game mode corresponding to the position (selection information).

  This makes it difficult to illegally change the game mode, and also makes it possible to prevent the game mode setting from being easily changed even when the mode setting switch 82 is operated by mistake. In addition, the game mode can be changed only when the game machine is initialized with power-on and the mode setting lock is turned on by operating the setting key at a specific time. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of fraud. Specifically, if it is assumed that the game mode can be changed during the game or when the game state is restored, for example, in the low-probability state, the “big game probability” in the low-probability state is the highest. ”And enters the high-probability state, the setting is changed to“ game mode 4 ”or“ game mode 5 ”to increase the jackpot occurrence probability in the high-probability state or increase the continuation rate of the high-probability state. Such irregularities may occur. However, in the present embodiment, in order to change the setting of the game mode, it is necessary to initialize the gaming machine (RAM clear) without fail. It needs to be in a state. As a result, such fraud does not occur.

  In this manner, the game mode change timing is set to “when power is turned on (start of power supply)”, and the game mode can be changed only when “the game machine is initialized and the setting key is operated in a predetermined manner”. This can be referred to as “game mode change conditions”. Further, since the game mode can be changed only in the process (mode setting process) performed after the power is turned on and before the game is started, the game state is changed from the initial state (for example, a high probability state, a high base state). The game mode cannot be changed in the state, the time reduction state, the big hit game, during the symbol change display).

[Mode check processing]
Next, a mode checking process (S3119) for checking the game mode being set will be described with reference to FIG. In the mode confirmation process (S3119), first, it is determined whether or not the mode setting key is ON, that is, whether or not the backed up game state information has been restored without erasing (initializing) and the mode setting lock unit 89 has been turned on. The judgment is made (S5001). If it is determined in S5001 that the mode setting key is ON (YES in S5001), the process proceeds to S5002. That is, when the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89, the operation is rotated from the OFF position to the ON position, and the RAM clear switch is not turned on (the initialization operation is performed). And OFF), and the power is turned on. In this case, it is assumed that the specific check condition is satisfied, and the gaming machine is set to the “game mode check state”.

  In S5002, it is determined whether or not the mode confirmation flag indicating the "game mode confirmation state" in which the set game mode can be confirmed is ON (S5002), and when it is determined that the mode confirmation flag is not ON (NO in S5002), the mode check flag is turned ON, the state is set to the "game mode check state", and the process proceeds to S5004. If it is determined in S5002 that the mode confirmation flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the game mode has already been set to the “game mode confirmation state” (YES in S5002), the process proceeds to S5004. In S5004, the game mode currently set (stored in the backup area) is read (S5004), and the read game mode is displayed on the information display section 88 (S5005). It is determined whether it is (S5006).

  When the currently set game mode is displayed on the information display unit 88, information corresponding to the game mode is displayed on the right end fourth information display unit 88d by the same display control as described above. I do. The display control for the other information display sections (88a, 88b, 88c) is the same as described above. If it is determined in S5001 that the mode setting key is not OFF, that is, it is determined that the game mode is still in the “game mode confirmation state” (NO in S5006), the process returns to S5002, and the processes up to S5006 are performed again. On the other hand, if the mode setting key is OFF in S5006, that is, if it is determined that the game clerk has completed the confirmation of the game mode and has rotated the setting key to the OFF position (YES in S5006), the mode confirmation flag is turned OFF. To end the "game mode confirmation state" (S5007), and ends the processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5001 that the mode setting key is not ON (NO in S5001), the process ends without generating the “game mode confirmation state”. When it is determined that the mode setting key is ON without being initialized, a notification indicating that the game mode has been set to the “game mode confirmation state” may be given using a display unit such as an LED. Similarly, when the game mode is set to the “game mode change state”, a notification indicating that the game mode is changed to the game mode change state may be given. Then, these notifications are ended based on the transition to the game possible state. Thereby, a game clerk or the like can easily grasp whether the state of the gaming machine is set to the “game mode change state” or the “game mode confirmation state”.

  As described above, the confirmation timing of the game mode is set to “when power is turned on (start of power supply)”, and the confirmation of the game mode is set to “when the game machine is not initialized and the set key is operated in a predetermined manner”. It is possible to refer to what is made possible only as a "game mode confirmation condition". Also, since the game mode can be checked only in the process (mode setting process) performed after the power is turned on and before the game is started, the game mode can be checked while the game is being executed (during the execution of the game). Can not. Thereby, a situation in which the player (illegal player) checks the gaming mode of the gaming machine during the game, and illegally selects a gaming machine with a high setting (for example, gaming mode 3) that is advantageous to him / her and plays the game. Can be prevented as much as possible.

[Power-on notification process]
Next, a power-on notification process (S107) for notifying in which of the plurality of power-on modes the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In the power-on notification processing (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the initialization maintaining flag is ON, that is, whether or not the flag indicating the power-on state (startup state) turned on in the mode setting processing (S106) is the initialization maintaining flag. Is determined (S5101). If it is determined in S5101 that the initialization maintaining flag is ON (YES in S5101), the power-on mode indicated by the initialization maintaining flag is [the game state information is initialized and the setting of the game mode is changed. Notify] in the "first notification mode (first startup notification mode)" (S5102), and the process shifts to S5103.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S5101 that the initialization maintaining flag is not ON (NO in S5101), then, it is determined whether or not the setting change flag is ON, that is, the power-on mode (startup) that was turned ON in the mode setting process (S106). It is determined whether the flag indicating (mode) is a setting change flag (S5105). In S5105, when it is determined that the setting change flag is ON (YES in S5105), the power-on mode indicated by the setting change flag is [game state information is initialized and the game mode setting is changed]. The notification is performed in the “second notification mode (second startup notification mode)” corresponding to the above (S5106), and then a setting change command is transmitted to the sub control unit 90 (S5108), and the processing shifts to S5103. It should be noted that the setting change command is transmitted when the game state information is initialized and the game mode setting is changed (set to the setting changed state). In addition, the sub-control unit 90 that has received the setting change command uses the notification unit (effect design display unit, board lamp, speaker, or the like) controlled by the sub-control unit 90 to indicate that the game mode setting has been changed. Show. The notification (S5102, S5106, S5107) in the power-on notification process is performed by a notification unit (display unit) controlled by the main control unit 80. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5105 that the setting change flag is not ON (NO in S5105), it is determined that the flag indicating the power-on mode (startup mode) turned ON in the mode setting process (S106) is the recovery flag. The third notification mode (at the time of the third activation) corresponding to the power-on mode indicated by the recovery flag [the game state information has been recovered (not initialized) and the game mode setting has not been changed]. Notification mode) "(S5107), and shifts to the process of S5103.

  Here, “first notification mode (first startup notification mode)”, “second notification mode (second startup notification mode)”, and “third notification mode (third startup notification mode)” are respectively defined. The notification modes are different, and the person who has contacted (seen) these notification modes determines whether or not the power-on mode (activation mode) performed by the user is as intended (the game mode change). , The presence or absence of initialization) can be confirmed. In the first notification mode, the second notification mode, and the third notification mode, display modes (display characters, display characters, display colors, emission colors, blinking speeds, lighting times, and the like) performed by an LED, a liquid crystal display unit, and the like are used. It can be different. Also, the sounds (sound types and volume) output from the speakers may be different. In addition, these plural elements may be executed in combination, or may be executed alone. Further, a plurality of elements may be different from other notification modes, or only one element may be different from other notification modes.

  In addition, these notification modes may be executed only on the display unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine, and may not be executed on the display unit provided on the front side of the gaming machine. This allows a game mode clerk such as a game clerk to check the power-on mode, but makes it difficult for others, for example, a player, to check the power-on mode. The notification may be provided by a plurality of notification units provided on the back side of the gaming machine and on the front side of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to more reliably confirm whether the power-on mode (start-up mode) performed by the user is as intended. Further, the notification may be performed only by the notification unit provided on the front side of the gaming machine.

  Further, any one of the “first notification mode (first startup notification mode)”, the “second notification mode (second startup notification mode)”, and the “third notification mode (third startup notification mode)” There is provided a counting means (time counting means) for counting (time counting) the notification time since the start of the notification. In S5103, it is determined whether or not the specific notification time has elapsed based on the value of the counting means (time measuring means) (S5103). If it is determined that the specific notification time has not elapsed (NO in S5103), S5103 And the determination is repeated until the specified notification time comes (S5103). If it is determined in S5103 that the specific notification time has elapsed (YES in S5103), the notification being executed is ended (S5104), and the process ends. In this embodiment, the specific notification time is set to about 10 seconds. As described above, the notification mode associated with the power-on differs depending on the power-on mode (whether the initialization has been performed or whether the setting has been changed). It is possible to confirm whether or not this is the case.

  Also, when the initialization (RAM clear) is performed, the initialization notification is performed, and when the initialization is not performed, the initialization notification is not performed. Even when the initialization is performed, the game mode setting is changed. It is also possible to change the mode of the initialization notification between when and when not performed (first initialization notification, second initialization notification).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the interrupt processing (S105), first, the output processing (S201) is executed. In the output process (S201), a command (control signal) set in an output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub-control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. I do. The command or the like output here includes information on the game state, the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, the symbol as the big hit type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper one byte is information on the type of command, and the lower one byte is information on the contents of the command.

  In the input process (S202) performed subsequent to the output process (S201), various sensors (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, first winning opening sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. 30a, the second special winning opening sensor 35a, the general ball opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. Further, a detection signal from a lower plate full detection sensor for detecting the fullness of the lower plate 62 is also fetched and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as lower plate full data.

  The normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and other periods (after the end of the interrupt process (S105), (The period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started).

  Subsequent to the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203), a base display process (S212) described later, a starting opening sensor detection process (S204) described later, a general symbol operation process (S205), and a special figure operation process (S206) Then, a specific area sensor detection process (S207), a starting ball entry process (S208), a power-off monitoring process (S209), and a mode setting monitoring process (S210) are executed. After that, other processing not deeply related to the present invention (S210) is executed, and the interruption processing (S105) is ended. Then, the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 next. When the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 ms), the interrupt process is performed again. (S105) is executed. In the output processing (S201) of the interrupt processing (S105) executed again, the command and the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt processing (S105) are output.

[Base display processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a base display process for displaying a “base value” that is a ratio of the number of prize balls paid out to the number of fired balls in a specific period (a period excluding the high base state and the jackpot game) (S212). ) Will be described. When a game ball is fired in the game area 3 and the shot game ball enters a ball opening (winning opening) such as the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, or the general ball opening 27, the ball enters. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player for each mouth (a game profit is given). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3, a large number of game nails 16 for changing the flowing direction of the game ball are provided in the game area 3. The ball entry rate of the game ball will change.

  In addition, gaming machines installed in gaming arcades are inspected by a predetermined third-party inspection organization, and only gaming machines that pass the inspection are recognized as appropriate gaming machines, and can be installed in gaming arcades. The inspection target also includes a base value, and the game needs to be executed with an appropriate base value. However, the higher the base value (the higher the entrance rate to the entrance), the more advantageous to the player. Therefore, depending on the game store, the angle (orientation) of the game nail 16 is adjusted and the entrance to the entrance is adjusted. In some cases reduced the ball entry rate. When such an adjustment is performed, the installed gaming machine becomes a gaming machine having a performance different from that of a gaming machine that has passed the inspection, and is not appropriate.

  Therefore, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with the above-described out sensor 29 to count the number (total number) of gaming balls fired in the gaming area, and to count the number of gaming balls paid out as prize balls. The base value of the gaming machine is calculated and displayed. Note that the base value of the present embodiment includes a first base value and a second base value, and the “first base value” is the total number of shot spheres (the number of outs) stored for calculating the first base value. ) And the total number of prize balls stored for calculating the first base value, the base value (real-time base value) of the entire period (excluding the high base state and the big hit game) (first). Period-based value). The “second base value” is the number of special-period firing balls (number of special period outs) stored for calculating the second base value in the determined special period, and is stored for calculating the second base value. The special period base value (fixed period base value) is shown from the number of special period prize balls.

  More specifically, the second base value is calculated by “the total number of awarded balls in the current period / 5000” each time the total number of launched balls reaches 5000. Then, the second base value is updated every time the total number of shot balls is 5000. Therefore, in a gaming machine that starts a game for the first time, the second base value is not displayed until the total number of fired balls reaches 5000. Specifically, as a mode in which only the center of the 7-segment display section of the third information display section 88c and the fourth information display section 88d blinks until the first second base value is calculated, "b2. −− ”is displayed. Also, the calculated first base value and second base value are displayed on the information display section 88. This information display section 88 is used when the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the gaming machine is in the "playable state". , The base value (first base value or second base value) is always displayed. The main control board 80 has a display changeover switch (not shown) for changing the display content of the base value of the information display section 88 to the first base value or the second base value. Then, in this base display state (playable state), the display content displayed on the information display unit 88 can be switched to the first base value or the second base value by operating the display changeover switch.

  The display mode of the base value in the information display section 88 is a display mode capable of displaying information indicating which base value is being displayed and the base value up to the second decimal place. In addition, in order to establish the business of the game store, the base value (the number of prize balls / the number of shot balls) is usually smaller than “1”. The specific display mode will be described below. For example, at a predetermined timing, the first base value is “0.25” and the second base value is “0.26”. In the case of displaying the first base value, the 7-segment display section of the first information display section 88a and the second information display section 88b is used to light up the display to be "b1", and the second information display section 88b is displayed. Light the dot display to indicate the decimal point. Then, numerical values below the decimal point are displayed using the 7-segment display sections of the third information display section 88c and the fourth information display section 88d. As a result, “b1.25” is displayed on the information display unit 88. Since the first base value is a base value that changes in real time, the first base value changes in real time to “b1.26” or “b1.24” according to an increase in the winning ball ratio and an increase in the out ratio. The third decimal place shall be rounded off to calculate the base value. Further, the display mode of the second base value displayed by operating the predetermined changeover switch is the same as the first base value, and specifically, “b2.26” is displayed.

  In this embodiment, a new second base value is calculated each time the number of 5,000 shooting balls is counted, and the base value displayed as the second base value is updated. That is, if the total number of fired balls is 0 to 4999, “the second base value: no display” is set, and if the total number of fired balls is 5000 to 9999, the “second base value: the base value of the period of 1 to 5000 is set. Display "," the second base value: updated to the base value in the period from 5001 to 10000 "until the total number of fired balls reaches 10000 to 14999, and so on.

  In the present embodiment, only the most recently calculated second base value is displayed. However, in addition to such an aspect, a third base value, a fourth base value, a fifth base value,. By operating a predetermined changeover switch, these base values may be displayed. The second base value is stored as a past second base value for each update, the immediately preceding second base value is defined as a third base value, and the second previous base value is defined as a fourth base value. The third base value before the fifth base value may be displayed as the fifth base value, in this order. As a result, the past second base value can also be a target of confirmation (inspection).

  The first base value is calculated in real time each time the out sensor 29 detects a launch ball (out ball) or pays out a prize ball. If the first base value changes to two or more decimal places, The display is updated each time. As another aspect, the first base value has a large error (numerical value is not stable) due to accidental continuous ball entry immediately after the start of the game. The calculated value (first base value) may not be indicated (not displayed) until the number reaches (for example, 200). For example, only the center of the 7-segment display section of the third information display section 88c and the fourth information display section 88d may be blinked until the specific number of balls is reached. Specifically, “b1. −− ”is displayed. Then, the first base value calculated at the time when the total number of fired balls reaches 200 may be displayed (for example, “b1.35”).

  In addition, base values such as a first base value and a second base value (including a third base value and a fourth base value) and data for calculating the base value (the number of fired balls, the number of awarded balls) The count value, etc.) is set as a backup target at the time of power failure and is stored in a specific backup area. Further, the base-related information stored in the specific backup area is used for inspection and confirmation, and thus is not subject to initialization using a RAM clear switch or the like. Therefore, these pieces of base-related information are information that is not deleted even if the gaming machine is initialized.

  As another aspect, it is impossible to initialize these base-related information without opening (opening) the main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80. The initialization may be enabled by opening a switch and operating a switch or the like provided inside. Thus, if there is an abnormality in the base value or the like, it is possible to perform an initialization (reset) together with opening of the main control board storage case after receiving an inspection. In addition, since the main control board storage case requires destruction of some parts along with the opening (since the opening is identifiable), if the base-related information is illegally erased, The act is recognizable. This makes it possible to prevent fraud.

  Further, information indicating these base values (the first base value, the second base value, etc.) may be externally output from a predetermined external terminal to a hall computer or the like connected to the external terminal. This makes it possible for the hall computer to easily grasp the abnormality of the base value. In addition, the plurality of base values (first base value, second base value, etc.) received by the hall computer are managed, and an abnormality occurs in a plurality of (all) base values by a base abnormality determination unit provided in the hall computer. When it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, the occurrence of the abnormality can be notified. As a form of the abnormality notification, a display (a liquid crystal, an LED, a lamp, or the like) connected to the hall computer is displayed in a form indicating a base error, or a base machine external lamp provided for each game machine indicates the base error. It can be displayed in an aspect, displayed in an aspect indicating that an error has occurred, or can output an error sound from a speaker. Of course, when such a base error occurs, an error display or an error sound may be output from a display unit or a speaker included in the gaming machine, not limited to the display unit connected to the hall computer. As a result, when a base error occurs, the gaming store can quickly recognize the occurrence of the error and prevent unexpected disadvantages as much as possible.

  In the base display process (S212), first, it is determined whether or not it is during working hours (S5201). If it is determined that it is not during working hours (NO in S5201), it is then determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S5202). If it is determined in S5202 that a big hit is not occurring (S5202), the process proceeds to S5203. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5201 that it is during working hours (YES in S5201), and if it is determined in S5202 that a big hit game is being played (YES in S5202), the first base value and the second base value are calculated ( Update), the processing shifts to S5209. This is because the first base value and the second base value are the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) and the prize balls generated when the game state is in the low base state (specific period) except during the time saving and big hit games. Calculated for numbers. That is, the first base value and the second base value are values indicating the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of out balls (the number of fired balls) in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of outs during the time reduction and the big hit game The number of balls (the number of shot balls) and the number of award balls are not used as data for calculating the first base value and the second base value.

  In S5203, it is determined whether or not an out ball has been detected, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the out sensor 29 (S5203). If it is determined that a game ball has been detected by the out sensor 29 (YES in S5203), By adding the detected values, a first base value and a second base value (including a value for updating to a new second base value) are calculated (updated) (S5204), and the calculated value is calculated. The storage is performed (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5206. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5203 that the out-sensor 29 has not detected a game ball (NO in S5203), the process shifts to S5206 without updating the number of out-balls. Steps S5203 to S5205 are processing for updating the number of out-balls in calculating the first base value and the second base value.

  In S5206, it is determined whether or not a prize ball has been paid out (S5206). If it is determined that a prize ball has been paid out (YES in S5206), the number of prize balls that have been paid out is added, and the first ball is added. A base value and a second base value (including a value for updating to a new second base value) are calculated (updated) (S5207), the calculated values are stored (S5208), and the process proceeds to S5209. I do. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5206 that no prize balls have been paid out (NO in S5206), the process shifts to S5209 without updating the number of prize balls. Steps S5206 to S5208 are processing for updating the number of winning balls in calculating the first base value and the second base value.

  In S5209, the setting of the information display unit 88, that is, which base value (first base value or second base value) the information display unit 88 is set to be displayed by the changeover switch is read (S5209). The updated base value according to the setting is displayed on the information display unit 88 (S5210), and the process ends. Thereby, it is possible to update the base value to be displayed at a timing corresponding to each base value, and to display the updated base value on the information display unit 88 when the base value is updated. .

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the starting port sensor detection processing (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). . If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls (the number of ordinary symbol reserved, specifically, the value of a counter provided in the RAM for counting the number of ordinary symbol reserved) is increased. It is determined whether it is 4 or more (S302). If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

  If the number of normally reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the flow proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls (S303), and ordinary symbol random number acquisition processing (S304) is performed. In the ordinary symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the ordinary symbol random number counter (label-TRND-H) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired, and the acquired random number value is acquired. The (acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol retaining balls in the general symbol retaining storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S305). If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, but if the game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the special map The number of 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reservations, specifically, the value of the counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) reaches four (upper limit number). It is determined whether or not there is (S306). If the number of reserved special figure 2 balls has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309, but if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than four (NO in S306), One is added to the number of reserved special figure 2 balls (S307).

  Subsequently, a special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the big hit type determination random number The value of the counter (label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are obtained (that is, the random numbers shown in FIG. 8A). ), And the obtained random number values (acquisition information) are stored in the address space according to the current number of special figure 2 reserved spheres in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

  Subsequently, in the starting port sensor detection process (S204), it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 20, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a (S309). ). If no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (NO in S309), the process is terminated. If a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S309), the special map is executed. The number of 1 reserved balls (the number of the first special figure reservations, specifically, the value of the counter for counting the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) reaches four (upper limit number). It is determined whether or not there is (S310). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S310), the processing is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than four (NO in S310), "1" is added to the number of reserved special figure 1 balls (S311).

  Subsequently, special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312), similarly to the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308), the value of the special symbol hit / fail determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (That is, the random number values shown in FIG. 8A are obtained), and the obtained random number values are stored in the address space according to the current number of special figure 1 reserved spheres in the first special figure reserved storage unit 85a. .

[Public figure operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a general-purpose operation process (S205) shown in FIG. 20 subsequent to the start-up opening sensor detection process (S204). In the general operation process (S205), the process relating to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable prize device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. . If the “usual figure operation status” is “1” (YES in S401), a normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and if the “usual figure operation status” is “2” (S401). , NO in S403), the normal symbol variation processing (S404) is performed, and when the “general symbol operation status” is “3” (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is determined. The process (S406) is performed, and when the “ordinary drawing operation status” is “4” (S401, S403, and S405 are all NO), the normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the ordinary symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is "0" (YES in S501). This process ends. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), a normal symbol hit / fail judgment process described later is performed (S502). After the normal symbol hit / fail judgment process (S502), a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, if the gaming state is a time reduction state, a normal symbol variation pattern in which the variation time of the ordinary symbol is 1 second is selected with reference to the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. I do. On the other hand, if the gaming state is the non-time saving state, the normal symbol variation pattern in which the ordinary symbol variation time is 30 seconds is selected. After the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection process, the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed. After the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), an ordinary symbol change start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the ordinary symbol variation start process, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started with the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the ordinary operation status is set to “2”. In the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of the normal symbol change.

[Normal symbol hit / fail judgment processing]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the ordinary symbol hit / fail judgment process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / no judgment random number counter stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (that is, whether or not the gaming state is the time reduction state) (S602). In S602, when it is determined that the time reduction flag is ON, that is, it is determined that the vehicle is in the time reduction state (YES in S602), the table for the time reduction state (the collision determination value is one of the ordinary symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a hit has been made based on the high-probability ordinary figure right / wrong determination based on “0” to “239” (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the read value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether the symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values. On the other hand, in S602, when it is determined that the time reduction flag is not ON, that is, in the non-time reduction state (NO in S602), the non-time reduction state table (N) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a hit has been made by a low-probability ordinary figure right / wrong judgment based on the hit judgment values “0” and “1” (S603), and the process proceeds to S605.
Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the general figure hit / fail determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605). If it is determined to be out (NO in S605), stop display is performed. A normal symbol (a symbol deviating from the ordinary symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S605 that the hit is a hit (normal symbol hit) (YES in S605), a hit normal symbol (symbol hit symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Regular pattern random number shift processing]
After the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) is executed. As shown in FIG. 23, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each of the general-purpose reservations in the general-purpose storage is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order pending storage in the general-purpose reserve storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth general-purpose reserve storage is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general drawing reservation is digested in the reservation order.

[Processing during normal symbol fluctuation]
As shown in FIG. 24, in the normal symbol change processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the change time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if not, the process ends (NO in S801). On the other hand, if the time has elapsed (YES in S801), a normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), and the ordinary symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol with a display result (hit ordinary symbol or out-of-range ordinary symbol) corresponding to the determination result of the random number for the ordinary symbol hit determination (S804), this processing is performed. Finish.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
As shown in FIG. 25, in the ordinary symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If the ordinary figure flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ordinary figure flag is ON (YES in S901), subsequently, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the time reduction state (S902). If it is during the time saving state (YES in S902), an opening pattern during the time saving state is set as an opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). The opening pattern during the time saving state is an opening pattern in which opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, “3” is set in the second start-up opening counter which counts the number of times the second start-up opening 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S902), the release pattern in the non-time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). The release pattern during the non-time saving state is, as described above, a release pattern in which release for 0.2 seconds is performed once. Therefore, "1" is set to the second starting port opening counter. Then, following the setting of the release pattern (S903, S906), the general-purpose operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this processing ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary figure end flag is ON (S1001). The ordinary figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. If the normal flag end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is not being opened (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (timing) (S1003), and if not (NO in S1003), the process is completed and the process is completed. For example, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the second start-up port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined whether or not it is time to close the second start-up port 21 (ie, whether the second start-up port 21 has been opened or not). (S1005), and if not reached (NO in S1005), the process is terminated. If it has reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed). (S1006).

  After the closing process of the second opening 21 (S1006), the value of the second opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether the value of the second opening counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not “0” (NO in S1008), the process is terminated as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), a per-figure per end processing for terminating the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and a per-figure per end flag is set (S1010) to end the processing. Note that the second starting port opening counter becomes “0” when the opening of the second starting port 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times during the time reduction state, and during the non-time saving state. When the opening of the second starting port 21 is performed once, it becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, if the end flag in FIG. 10 is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 set in S903 or S906 has been completed. The end flag is turned off (S1011), the flag per ordinary figure is turned off (S1012), and the general figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is ended. As a result, in the next interruption process, the ordinary symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the ordinary symbol operation process (FIG. 20).

[Special figure operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure operation processing (S206) following the ordinary figure operation processing (S205). In the special figure operation process (S206), as shown in FIG. 27, the process related to the special symbol display 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into five stages. Are assigned to "special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5". When the "special figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), a special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure operation status" is "2" (S1101). , NO in S1103), special symbol change processing (S1104) is performed, and if the "special symbol operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105), the special symbol is determined. The process (S1106) is performed, and when the "special figure operation status" is "4" (NO in both S1101, S1103, and S1105, YES in S1107), the special electric accessory processing 1 as a big hit game (S1108) If the “special figure operation status” is “5” (S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are all NO), the special electric auditors processing 2 (S1109) as the small hit game is performed. The special figure operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 28, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of reserved special ball 2) is “0” (S1201). . If the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is “0” (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the second starting port 21, the first starting It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1) is “0” (S1206). If the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the first starting port 20, the image is displayed. It is determined whether or not the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is in the process of being set as the standby screen (during the execution of the customer waiting demo screen) (S1211), and if so (YES in S1211), the process ends. Otherwise (NO in S1211), a standby screen setting process is executed to display a standby screen (S1212).

  In the case where the special figure 2 reserved ball number is not “0” in S1201 (NO in S1201), that is, when there is one or more storage of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the second starting port 21, The special figure 2 hit / fail determination processing (S1202), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1203), the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1204), and the special figure 2 variation start processing (S1205) are performed in this order. When the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is “0” but the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is not “0” (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value of the second starting port 21 Although there is no storage, if there is at least one storage of the random number counter value obtained due to the ball entering the first starting port 20, the special figure 1 hit / fail determination processing (S1207) described later, the special figure 1 change The pattern selection processing (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), and the special figure 1 change start processing (S1210) are performed in this order. As described above, in the first embodiment, the change display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure reservation is performed only when the second special figure reservation is “0” (YES in S1201). That is, the digestion of the second special figure reservation (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure reservation (variable display of the first special symbol). Then, in the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the second special figure hold is more likely to be a big hit with a large profit for the player than the hit / fail judgment based on the first special figure hold.

[Special figure 2 hit / fail judgment processing]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure 2 win / fail determination processing (S1202), first, as the determination value, the lowest area of the second special figure holding storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the first area of the second special figure holding) The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for special symbol hit / fail judgment stored in the (oldest memory) stored in the corresponding RAM area is read (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON, that is, whether or not the state is in the high probability state (S1302). If the state is not the high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if the state is the normal state, the normal corresponding to the game mode (for example, the game mode 2) set in the big hit determination table (FIG. 9A). A hit determination is made based on the state big hit determination table (big hit determination values are “3” and “397”) (S1303). On the other hand, if the state is the high probability state (YES in S1302), the big hit determination table for the high probability state corresponding to the set game mode (for example, the game mode 2) in the big hit determination table (FIG. 9A). (S1307). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “53”, “113”, “173”, “227”, “281”, “337”, “397”, “449”. , "503". Although a detailed description is omitted, when the game mode is set to a game mode other than the game mode 2, the game mode is set based on the big hit determination table corresponding to the set game mode shown in FIG. In this case, the rejection determination is performed. The big hit determination value at that time is also as shown in FIG.

  When the result of the jackpot determination (S1303, S1309) is determined to be "big hit" (YES in S1304), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS) is read and set as shown in FIG. The big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination table corresponding to the game mode (S1310), the big hit symbol is determined based on the value of the big hit type determining random number (S1311), and the big hit flag is turned on (S1312). ), Finish the process. In addition, in the case of the hit determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined by using the big hit type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit determination of the second special symbol, the hit is determined for the second special symbol. The big hit type is determined using the big hit type determination table. If it is determined that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, one of 15R first big hit, 15R second big hit and 2R third big hit is executed. When it is determined that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, it is determined that all the hits are the 15R fourth big hit (FIG. 8B).

  The big hit flag includes a long hit flag that is turned on when the type of the big hit is the 15R first big hit or the 15R second big hit, and a short hit flag that is turned on when the big hit type is the 2R third big hit. Here, the round display 45 is composed of two LEDs, a 2R lamp and a 15R lamp, and when the 2R third big hit and the short hit flag are turned on, the 2R third big hit symbol Is displayed, the 2R lamp is lit. Specifically, a display mode such as “2RＲ15R △” (for example, ：: turned on, Δ: turned off) is obtained. When the long hit flag is turned ON in one of the 15R first big hit, the 15R second big hit, and the 15R fourth big hit, the 15R lamp is turned on at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is definitely displayed. Is displayed. Specifically, a display mode such as “2R △ 15R ▲” is obtained.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1303, S1307) is not “big hit” (NO in S1304), the result corresponds to the small hit determination table corresponding to the set game mode (for example, game mode 2). Using the small hit determination table for small hits, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S1305). That is, in the case of the game mode 2, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol hit determination random number counter matches any of the small hit determination values “101” to “105”. (FIG. 9). Then, when it is determined that it is not a small hit (NO in S1305), a missing symbol is determined (S1308), and the process is terminated. If it is determined that a small hit is made (YES in S1305), a small hit symbol is determined (S1306), a small hit flag is turned on (S1306), and the process is terminated. In addition, a random number for determining whether or not a small hit may be provided separately from the random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is accepted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
In the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 28), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing is performed (S1203) following the special figure 2 hit / fail determination processing (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the time reduction state (whether the time reduction flag is ON) (S1401). If it is not the time reduction state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is the non-time reduction state, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S1402). If it is ON (YES in S1402), A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the application table (the portion corresponding to the non-time saving state and the big hit in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 11) (S1403). . If the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Further, in the first embodiment, the non-time saving state middle and big hit table is divided depending on whether the big hit is a long hit (15R big hit) or a short hit (2R big hit). However, since this process is a variation pattern selection process for Toku-zu 2, there is only a 15R fourth big hit (long hit) in the big hit won in the lottery of Toku-zu 2. Therefore, the location referred to in this processing is always a location corresponding to the length, and the variation pattern P1 or the variation pattern P2 is selected. In addition, the table for the medium and large hits in the non-time saving state may not be divided into the long hit table and the short hit table. The same applies to the time saving state middle and big hit table to be described later.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is determined whether the small hit flag is ON (S1405). If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1405), the non-time saving state medium / small hit table (the portion corresponding to the non-time saving state and small hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is changed. A variation pattern is selected based on the pattern random number counter value (S1409). Specifically, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern P4 is always selected.

  If the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1405), it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is a reach-achieved random number value (S1406). As shown in FIG. 8 (C), the reach random number value is “0” to “5” in the time reduction state, and is “0” to “13” in the non-time reduction state. That is, the reach in the time reduction state is less likely to be reached than in the non-time reduction state. This is because, in the time reduction state, the speed of digestion of the reservation of a special figure is increased by selecting a larger number of non-reach effects without short fluctuation times.

  When the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is a reach-achieved random value (YES in S1406), that is, in the case of the reach / non-reach, the table for the reach / non-reach during the non-time saving state (variation shown in FIG. 11) A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value with reference to the non-time saving state and the portion with or without reach in the pattern table (S1407). In the first embodiment, the fluctuation pattern P5 or P6 is selected.

  When the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is not a reach random number value (NO in S1406), that is, in the case of non-reach, in the case of non-time saving state, the table for non-reach during reach (variation pattern shown in FIG. 11) A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value with reference to the non-time saving state and the non-reach out of the table (S1408). When the reach is not lost, a function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "3" or "4", a variation pattern having a shorter variation time is selected as compared with when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "0" to "2". It is supposed to be. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation pattern P7 or P8 is selected.

  When it is determined in S1401 that the gaming state is the time reduction state (YES in S1401), as shown in FIG. 31, the referenced variation pattern table is a table for the time reduction state (the variation pattern shown in FIG. 11). Processing (S1410 to S1416) is performed in the same flow as in steps S1402 to S1609, except that the part corresponding to the time saving state of the table is set. That is, if the hit is a big hit, the portion corresponding to the big hit in the time saving state of FIG. 11 is referred to. If the hit is a small hit, the portion corresponding to the small hit in the time saving state of FIG. In the time saving state of FIG. 11, reference is made to the portion corresponding to the presence or absence of the reach, and if there is no reach, the portion corresponding to the time reduction state and the absence of the reach is referred to in FIG. To select the fluctuation pattern.

  In the variation pattern table during the time reduction state (the portion corresponding to the time reduction state in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 11), the function of the shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls at the time of no-reach is “2”. Works when "4". That is, the shortening variation is more easily selected than during the non-time saving state. Further, when the long hit is won among the big hits, a change pattern having a shorter change time than in the non-time saving state is easily selected. That is, the fluctuation pattern table in the time reduction state is a table in which the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table in the non-time reduction state.

  After the selection of the variation pattern as described above, another process (S1404) shown in FIG. 30 is performed, and this process ends. In the other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1204), first, the special figure 2 reserved ball count is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is set to one lower position (for example, when the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is composed of the address space corresponding to the addresses “0000” to “0003”). , Address “0000” side) (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b, that is, (if the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure hold fourth The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this processing ends.

  After executing the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1204), the special figure 2 change start processing (S1205) of FIG. 28 is executed. In the special figure 2 change start process (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to “2”, the change start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the change display of the second special symbol is started. In the special symbol standby process (S1102) in FIG. 28, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” and the special figure 1 reserved ball number is not “0” (YES in S1201, NO in S1206) The special figure 1 hit / fail determination processing (S1207), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), and the special figure 1 variation start processing (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the special figure 1 hit / fail determination processing (S1207), processing (S1601 to S1609) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 hit / fail determination processing (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to Tokusatsu 1, in S1601, the lowest area of the first tokusatsu storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first tokusatsu of first tokusatsu) is stored. The stored random number counter value for special symbol determination (label-TRND-A) is read. Also, in the type determination of the big hit in S1608, there is a possibility that any of the 15R first big hit, the 15R second big hit, and the 2R third big hit is determined (FIG. 10). As shown in the column of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in FIG. 10, the distribution rate of each big hit is determined by the game mode. If it is determined that the type of the big hit is the 15R first big hit or the 15R second big hit, the long hit flag is turned on as a big hit flag in step S1609. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second big hit is the third big hit, the short hit flag is turned on as a big hit flag in S1609.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1208), the processing (S1701 to S1720) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1403) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this processing is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to Tokujin 1, if YES in S1702 (ie, if the big hit flag is ON), the type of big hit is further 15R big hit (15R first big hit or 15R second big hit). Is determined (S1703). If it is the 15R big hit (YES in S1703), the non-time saving state 15R big hit table (the portion corresponding to the non-time saving state and the long hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 11) is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern is obtained. A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1704). Specifically, the variation pattern P1 or the variation pattern P2 is selected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1703 that it is not the 15R big hit (NO in S1703), that is, if it is the 2R third big hit, the non-time saving state 2R big hit table (the non-time saving state of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value with reference to the short hit portion (S1706). Specifically, the variation pattern P3 is selected.

  Also, in this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, in the case of YES in S1712 (that is, when the big hit flag is ON), the type of big hit is further 15R big hit (either 15R first big hit or 15R second big hit). It is determined whether or not (S1713). If it is a 15R big hit (YES in S1713), the fluctuation pattern random number counter is referred to in the time reduction state by referring to the 15R big hit table (the part corresponding to the time reduction state and the long hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 11). A variation pattern is selected based on the value (S1714). Specifically, any one of the fluctuation patterns P9 to P11 is selected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1713 that it is not the 15R big hit (NO in S1713), that is, if it is the 2R third big hit, the 2R big hit table in the time saving state (the time saving state and the short hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 11). , A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1715). Specifically, the variation pattern P12 is selected.

  In this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, after the variation patterns are selected (S1704, S1706, S1709, S1710, S1711, S1714, S1715, S1718, S1719, S1720), other processes (S1705, FIG. 27) To end this processing. In the other processing (S1705), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 36, in the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), first, the special figure 1 reserved sphere number is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage locations of the various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a are shifted down by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the highest-order address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, (when the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this processing ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), the special figure 1 change start processing (S1210) of FIG. 28 is executed. In the special figure 1 change start process (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the change start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the change display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol change processing]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the special symbol change processing (S1104), first, the change time of the special symbol (the change time determined according to the change pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of FIG. 28, see FIG. 11) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. Thus, the variable display of the special symbol is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the probable variable flag is ON (S1903). If it is ON (YES in S1903), the probable variable counter is decremented by 1 (S1904), and it is determined whether or not the value of the probable variable counter is "0" (S1904). S1905). If it is determined in step S1905 that the probability change counter is “0”, the probability change flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S1907. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probable change flag is not ON (NO in S1903) and when it is determined that the probable change counter is not “0” (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

  In S1907, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1907), and when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the number of times of variation display of the special symbol executed during the time saving state is counted. The value of the counter is decremented by 1 (S1908), and it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S1909). If it is “0” (YES in S1909), the time reduction flag is turned off (S1910). The process proceeds to S1911. If it is determined that the time reduction flag is not ON (NO in S1907), and if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911. In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the display of the change of the special symbol with a result corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing is ended.

[Special design confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), it is first determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S2001). If the big hit flag is ON (YES in S2001), then it is determined whether the type of big hit is 15R big hit (one of 15R first big hit, 15R second big hit, or 15R fourth big hit) (S2002). . If it is determined in S2002 that the type of the big hit is the 15R big hit (YES in S2002), “15” is set to the value of the round counter for counting the number of rounds executed during the big hit game (S2003). Move on to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the type of big hit is not 15R big hit (NO in S2002), that is, the type of big hit in this case is 2R big hit, so the value of the round counter is set to “2” ( S2004), and the process proceeds to S2005.

  In S2005, a special winning opening opening pattern according to the type of the big hit is set (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2006. Here, the opening pattern of the special winning opening is determined according to the type of the big hit (see FIG. 6), and in the present embodiment, the special winning opening that opens and closes in a specific round is fixed. More specifically, in any of the jackpots, the first and second rounds open and close the second big winning opening 35, and the third to 15th rounds open and close the first big winning opening 30 (if three or more rounds). Shall do. On the other hand, different types of jackpots open and close the same special winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening 35 in the first round) in a specific round, but may have different opening and closing patterns (opening patterns).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the special winning opening is determined for each type of big hit. Specifically, if it is the 15R first big hit, the opening pattern for the 15R first big hit is set, and the 15R first big hit opening pattern is executed during the execution of the 15R first big hit game. . Also, if the 15R is the second big hit, an open pattern for the 15R second big hit is set, if the 2R is the third big hit, the open pattern for the 2R third big hit is set, and if the 15R is the fourth big hit, the 15R fourth hit is set. Set the open pattern for big hits. Then, a big hit opening pattern corresponding to each big hit game is executed.

  In S2006, a big hit opening command is set to start a big hit game (S2006). The opening command is determined by the type of jackpot, and corresponds to each jackpot such as an opening command for 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot, 15R second jackpot, and 15R fourth jackpot), and an opening command for 2R third jackpot. Each is provided. Then, according to the set opening command, a corresponding opening period is executed thereafter. In S2007, the opening period of the big hit game is started (S2007), and the special figure operation status is set to "4" (S2008).

  If it is determined in S2001 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2001), then it is determined whether the small hit flag is ON (S2009). If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S2009), a small hit release pattern is set (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011. Here, the small hit opening pattern is to open the second big winning opening 35 twice for 0.9 seconds each. This is an open pattern similar to the open pattern of the 2R jackpot. In S2011, in order to start the small hitting game, the opening command of the small hitting game is set (S2011), the opening period of the small hitting game is started (S2012), and the special figure operation status is set to "5" ( S2013). Then, the main control unit 80 transmits the set small hit opening command to the sub control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201), and receives the small hit opening command. At 90, a predetermined game effect corresponding to the opening period is performed. If it is determined in S2009 that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2009), the special figure operation status is set to "1" because neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started (S2014), and the process is terminated. .

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 39, in the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108), first, it is determined whether or not the probable change flag is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the probable change flag is ON (YES in S2101), the probable change is performed. The flag is turned off (S2102), and then it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is on (S2103). If it is determined in S2103 that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. If NO is determined in S2101, the process proceeds to S2103 without turning off the probable change flag, and if NO is determined in S2103, the process proceeds to S2105 without turning off the time saving flag. That is, during the execution of the big hit game, the state is controlled to the low probability state and the non-time saving state. In the first embodiment, since the low base state is always set during the non-time saving state, the low base state is controlled during the execution of the big hit game.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). The big hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) in the big hit game has ended (the big hit game has ended). If it is determined that the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), then it is determined whether a predetermined round is being executed, that is, a special winning opening (a first special winning opening or a second special winning opening) determined for the predetermined round. It is determined whether or not the open pattern (open / close pattern) is being executed (S2106). If it is determined in S2106 that the round is not being executed (S2106), then it is determined whether it is the round start time (S2107). This is determined based on the big hit game opening pattern set for each big hit type described above. For example, before the start of the first round, the determination is made based on whether or not it is time to finish the opening period and execute the first opening process of the first round. If the first round has already been started, the determination is made based on whether or not the previous round has ended and a predetermined interval period has elapsed. Note that the round is simply referred to as “R”.

  If it is determined in S2107 that it is the round start time (YES in S2107), a round start command of the corresponding round is set (S2108), a special winning opening opening process is performed (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. As a result, the special winning opening is opened and a predetermined round is started. In S2108, a round start command that can specify the round to be started is set, such as "1R start command" for the start of the first round and "2R start command" for the start of the second round. . The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing of S201. In the big winning opening opening process of S2109, a big hit opening pattern determined according to the type of the big hit to be executed, and an opening pattern set in the round to be started is started. In S2110, it is determined whether the round to be started is the V round (the first round or the second round), that is, the second round winning opening 35 (also referred to as “V attacker”) having the specific area 39 therein is started. It is determined whether or not the opening round is a round in which the movable piece 150 is operated (the specific area 39 is in a state in which a game ball can pass) (S2110). In the present embodiment, two rounds, a first round and a second round, are set as V rounds in which the movable piece 150 is operated.

  If it is determined in S2110 that the round to be started is not the V round (the first round or the second round), that is, it is the third round or later (NO in S2110), the process ends. This may be determined using the value of the round counter for each jackpot type, or may be determined by providing a round counter for counting the number of rounds to be executed separately. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2110 that the round to be started is the V round (the first or second round) (YES in S2110), the validity period of the specific area is set based on a predetermined specific area valid pattern. At the same time (S2111), the opening / closing operation of the specific area is started based on the predetermined specific area opening / closing operation pattern (S2112), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2107 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2107), the process ends. Here, when it is determined that it is not the round start time, for example, during the opening period before the start of one round or during the interval period after the end of the round.

  Here, in the V round, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned on, the game state display 46 is set to a predetermined display mode, and the game state after the end of the big hit game has a high probability. Notify that it is in a state. Specifically, the game state display 46 is configured by three LEDs “a1a2a3”. In the first embodiment, in the normal state (low-probability state), the display mode is “a1a2a3 □” (for example, □: unlit, Δ: lit). At the timing when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the big hit game and the V flag is turned on, the display mode is set to “a1 {a2 {a3}”. Then, when the big hit game ends and the game state is set to the high probability state, the display mode is set to “a1 □ a2 □ a3 □”. Further, the lighting control timing of the game state display 46 is not limited to such timing, and during the big hit game, the display mode of “a1a2a3 □” is maintained even if the game ball passes the specific area. The display mode may be “a1 確 率 a2 ■ a3 ■” at the timing of transition to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game, and “a1 □ a2 □ a3 □” at the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. .

  That is, in the specific area sensor detection processing (FIG. 42) described later, the V flag is turned ON only when V passing (the passing of the game ball to the specific area 39) during the V valid period, and outside the V valid period (V invalid) The V flag is not turned on even if the V passage detection is performed during the period). When the V flag is ON, the certainty change flag is turned ON at a predetermined timing. That is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (game state setting processing (FIG. 36) described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned on based on the V passing due to the fraud, that is, it is prevented from being set to the high probability state illegally.

  In the first embodiment, in the V validity period setting process (S2111), the period (first period) in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be valid even in the case of the 15R second big hit is set. However, as another mode, in the case of the 15R second big hit, the first period may not be set in the first and second Rs. That is, in the case of the 15R second big hit, the first period and the second period may be set as the second period. In the big hit game related to the 15R second big hit, since the opening time of the second big winning port 35 is set to an extremely short time of 0.1 second, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the second big winning port 35. Although it is extremely low, if it is set in the second period, the V flag will not be turned on even if the ball is hit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being illegally turned ON or the V flag being turned ON due to rare ball entry. In this embodiment, the V round is the first round and the second round, but may be set to another round, the V round may be only one round, or three or more rounds. May be set.

  If it is determined in S2106 that the round is being executed (YES in S2106), the number of balls entered into the special winning opening in that round is set to the prescribed maximum number of balls (10 per round in the first embodiment). It is determined whether or not it has reached (S2113). If the number of entered balls has not been reached (NO in S2113), it is determined whether or not it is time to end the running round (whether or not all open patterns defined in the round have been completed) (S2114). If it is determined in S2114 that it is not time to end the round (NO in S2114), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2113 that the prescribed number of balls has been reached (the number of balls in the round is 10) (YES in S2113), or it is the end time of the round in S2114 (determined in the round) If it is determined that all of the open patterns have been completed (YES in S2114), that is, if one of the two round end conditions is satisfied, the process proceeds to S2115. In S2115, the round end command of the corresponding round is set (S2115), and the process shifts to S2116. In S2115, a round end command that can specify the round to be ended is set, such as "1R end command" for the end of the first round and "2R end command" for the end of the second round. . The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing of S201. In S2116, a predetermined special winning opening closing process is executed (S2116), then the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2117), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is “0” (S2118). If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “0” (NO in S2118), the process ends to start the next round.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2118), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (S2119), and the jackpot ending effect is performed. It starts (S2120). Then, the big hit end flag is turned ON (S2121), and the process is ended. It should be noted that the round counter becomes “0” when the round (round game) is executed 15 times for a long hit (15R big hit), and two rounds (round game) for a short hit (2R big hit). When executed, it becomes "0".

  If the big hit end flag is ON in S2105 (YES in S2105), since the last round has been completed, it is determined whether or not the execution time of the big hit ending effect has elapsed (S2122). If it has not elapsed (NO in S2122), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2122), the big hit end flag is turned off (S2123), and a game state setting process (S2124) described later is performed. Then, the big hit flag is turned off (S2125), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2126), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interruption processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) is executed again as the special figure operation processing (FIG. 24).

[Game state setting process]
As shown in FIG. 40, in the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned on in a specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35) described later. If it is determined in S2201 that the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the probable variable flag is turned on (S2202), the “140” is set in the probable variable counter (S2203), and the V flag is turned off (S2204). Then, the process proceeds to S2205. That is, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined whether or not to set the gaming state after the big hit game to the high probability state based on whether or not the V flag is ON in the gaming state setting processing.

  In S2205, it is determined whether or not the finished big hit game (big hit game executed this time) is a 15R big hit. Then, when it is determined that it is not the 15R big hit, that is, it is the 2R third big hit (NO in S2205), then, the game state before the big hit game, that is, the game state when the 2R third big hit is made is the time saving state. Is determined (S2208). If it is determined that the time saving state has not been reached (NO in S2208), the process ends without turning on the time saving flag. As a result, the game state after the current big hit game is a high probability state, a special symbol non-saving time state, and a low base state (that is, a highly accurate low base state). The high-accuracy low-base state ends when one of the following conditions is satisfied: the special symbol fluctuates 140 times and the next big hit occurs.

  On the other hand, in S2205, when it is determined that the finished big hit game (big hit game executed this time) is a 15R big hit (YES in S2205), or the game state when the 2R third big hit is made in S2208, the game time is reduced. If it is determined that the answer is YES (YES in S2208), the time reduction flag is turned ON (S2206), "140" is set in the time reduction counter (S2207), and the process is terminated. As a result, the game state after the current big hit game is a high probability state, a special symbol time saving state, and a high base state (that is, a high-accuracy high base state). The high-accuracy high base state ends when one of the following conditions is satisfied: the special symbol fluctuates 140 times and the next big hit occurs.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2201 that the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), it is determined whether or not the finished big hit game (the currently executed big hit game) is a 15R big hit (S2209), as described above. Then, in S2209, when it is determined that it is not the 15R big hit, that is, it is the 2R third big hit (NO in S2209), then, the game state before the big hit game, that is, the game state when the 2R third big hit becomes, It is determined whether it is in the state (S2210). If it is determined in S2210 that the time saving state has not been set (NO in S2210), the process ends without turning on the time saving flag. As a result, the game state after the current big hit game is a low probability state, a special symbol non-saving time state, and a low base state (ie, a low-probability low base state). On the other hand, in S2209, when it is determined that the finished big hit game (the currently executed big hit game) is a 15R big hit (YES in S2209), or in S22100, the game state when the 2R third big hit is made is a time saving state. If it is determined that the answer is YES (YES in S2210), the time reduction flag is turned ON (S2211), "100" is set in the time reduction counter (S2212), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the game state after the current big hit game is a low probability state, a special symbol time saving state, and a high base state (ie, a low-probability high base state). The low-probability-high base state ends when one of the following conditions is satisfied: the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed 100 times, and the next big hit occurs. In addition, the time saving counter and the probability change counter count the number of times that the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol are added.

  Further, in the case of the 2R third big hit, the processing (S2208, S2210) for determining whether the game state before the big hit game is the time saving state is performed because the operation state of the time saving function before and after the big hit game and the high base This is to make the operation state of the function (open extension function) the same as the small hit. If these operating states are different between the small hit and the 2R third big hit, even if it is difficult to recognize which hit in the opening pattern of the big winning opening, depending on the operating state thereafter, which hit (big hit) Or small hit) is determined. This makes it difficult to discriminate between the small hit and the 2R third big hit based on the opening pattern of the special winning opening, and also to make it difficult to discriminate according to the operating state of the time saving function and the high base generating function that occur thereafter.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 41, in the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) has been completed in the small hit game. If it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the opening operation of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 or the second special winning opening 35) is performed, that is, for the small hitting. It is determined whether the release pattern is being executed (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening is not in the opening operation (NO in S2302), it is determined whether or not it is time to open the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 35), that is, the small hit opening. It is determined whether or not the period has elapsed and it is time to start a predetermined opening operation (timing) (S2303).

  If it is determined in S2303 that it is not time to open the special winning opening (NO in S2303), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the special winning opening (YES in S2303), a V invalid period setting process is performed (S2304), and the second special winning opening is performed according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 7). 35 is released (S2305), and the process ends. In the V invalidation period setting process (S2304), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalidated during the opening of the second special winning opening 35 and for a few seconds after the closing of the second special winning opening 35 in the small hitting game. It is set to the period to be determined (second period). In the first embodiment, the period other than the period set as the valid period in the above-described V valid period setting process (S2111) is set as the invalid period (second period). Therefore, in this V invalid period setting processing, it is confirmed whether the valid period is set, that is, whether the invalid period is set. Specifically, it is checked whether the V timer (provided in the RAM of the main control board 80) for measuring the elapse of the V valid period by countdown is set to “0” (that is, the state without the valid period). I do. If the V timer is not "0", "0" is set in the V timer. Incidentally, "0" is set in the V timer without checking whether the V timer is "0". That is, the state may be set to a state without a valid period. Thus, even if there is V passing during the small hit, if the game state before the small hit game is the normal state, the game state after the small hit game is not shifted to the high probability state. However, during the small hitting game, since the movable piece 150 that allows the passage of the specific area 39 does not operate, the game ball does not pass through the specific area unless an unexpected situation (failure, malfunction, fraud, etc.) occurs. .

  In S2302, when it is determined that the opening operation of the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 35) is being performed (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the special winning opening during the small hitting game is the prescribed maximum entering ball. It is determined whether the number has reached (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If the prescribed number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is determined whether or not it is time to finish the opening operation (whether or not all the small hit opening patterns have been finished) (S2307). Then, if it is determined that the opening operation of the special winning opening has not been completed (NO in S2307), the processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2306 that the number of balls entering the special winning opening during the small hit game has reached the prescribed number of balls (YES in S2506), or the opening operation of the special winning opening is terminated in S2307. When it is determined that it is time (YES in S2307), a predetermined special winning opening closing process is performed (S2308), and the process proceeds to S2311. That is, as the termination condition of the small hitting game, (1) the opening operation defined for the small hitting game being executed is ended (for example, twice opening of 0.9 s) (2) The small hitting game being executed In the above, two conditions that a predetermined specified number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls have entered are defined. Then, when any one of the conditions is satisfied, the condition for ending the small hitting game is satisfied based on the previously satisfied condition. In S2311, as the small hit ending processing for ending the small hit game, an ending command of the small hit game is set (S2311), the ending period of the small hit is started (S2312), and the small hit end flag is turned ON (S2313). ), Finish the process. Here, in the small hit ending process in S2311, the process of setting the ending command is performed, but the ending command for the small hit is set. Also, the ending period for the small hit is the same as the ending period for the 2R third big hit, which also makes it difficult to distinguish between the small hit and the 2R third big hit.

  If it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), then it is determined whether a small hit ending period (ending time) has elapsed (S2315), and the ending period has elapsed. If it is determined that it has not been performed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending period has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the small hit flag is turned off (S2317), and the special figure operation status is set to “1”. (S2318), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interruption processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) is executed again as the special figure operation processing (FIG. 24). Note that, at the start of the small hitting game, the probability change flag and the time saving flag are not switched from ON to OFF. Also, at the end of the small hitting game, the game state setting process (S2124, FIG. 33) is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state is not changed before and after the execution of the small hitting game.

[Specific area sensor detection processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a specific area sensor detection process (S207) following the special map operation process (S206). In the specific area sensor detection process (S207), as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). If it is determined that there is no detection (NO in S2401), the process ends. If it is determined in S2401 that there is a detection (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not it is during the V validity period (S2402). The V effective period is a period set in the V effective period setting process (S2111) in the special electric auditors process 1 (FIG. 39). The V validity period is set in the first and second rounds of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined in S2402 that the V validity period is in progress (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), and whether or not the currently executing big hit game is a 2R big hit (2R third big hit) is determined. Is determined (S2404). If it is determined that the hit is not a 2R hit (NO in S2404), that is, if it is a 15R hit, a first V passing command is set (S2405), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a 2R big hit (YES in S2404), the second V passing command is set (S2406), and the process ends. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits the V-pass command to the sub-control board 90 at a predetermined timing, and the sub-control board 90 displays the effect symbol display according to the type of the received V-pass command and the game state at that time. A game effect is executed in an area or the like.

  If it is determined in S2402 that the V validity period is not in progress (NO in S2402), an invalid period pass command is set without turning on the V flag (S2407), and the process ends. Note that, in principle, the first V-pass command is a command for causing the sub-control board 90 to perform V-pass notification control. On the other hand, the second V-pass command is a command for preventing the sub-control board 90 from performing the V-pass notification control in principle. In the invalid period passage command, the game ball has passed the specific area on the main control board 80 or the sub control board 90 during the invalid period of the specific area. That is, it is a command for notifying that there is a possibility that some kind of trouble or fraud has occurred. This notification may be performed using the display screen 7a, a frame lamp, a panel lamp, a speaker, or the like, or may be performed by transmitting the information to a hall computer to perform the notification. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the specific area sensor detection processing (S207) and the V valid period setting processing (S2111) to switch the validity / invalidity of the passing of the game ball to the specific area 39. It functions as (specific area state switching means).

[Starting ball processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting ball entry process (S208) following the specific region sensor detection process (S207). As shown in FIG. 43, in the start ball entry processing (S208), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read. (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball count has increased by “1” (S2502). If it is determined in S2502 that the number of reserved special figure 2 balls has increased by “1” (YES in S2502), the flow shifts to the processing in S2503. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball count in S307 in the start-up sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second start-up port.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S2502), the flow shifts to the processing in S2506. In S2503, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) in the immediately preceding starting port sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the second special figure holding storage unit is read (S2503). S2503). Next, in S2504, the obtained random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S2504). Specifically, the value of the special symbol random number counter (special symbol random number) obtained when the ball enters the starting port is determined according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). To determine whether it is a big hit or a miss. If the determination result (preliminary determination result) is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined. This is a prior determination (so-called “holding”) in which the determination of whether or not to hold the special figure 2 (determination of whether or not it is a big hit) is performed prior to the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is to be determined (S1302, S1309) in the processing of determining whether or not a special figure 2 is described below (S1202). Look-ahead ”).

  The pre-judgment is a big hit determination table corresponding to the set game mode (see FIG. 9 (A)). (Probability state), it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the big hit determination value based on the big hit determination table for the normal state. As other pre-determination modes, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) are available as variation pattern information determination tables capable of determining variation pattern information. And a variation pattern information determination table. In the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (such as the value of a random number counter for determining whether a special symbol is accepted or not) and a variation pattern information determination table corresponding to a game state. It is possible to Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether it is a big hit, a big hit type, a game effect with a high hit reliability, or the like.

  Next, in S2505, game information including at least the reserved ball count data relating to the second special symbol read in S2501 and the information (prior determination information) determined in advance in S2504 is generated as a special figure 2 start ball entry command. The command is set in an output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 for transmitting a command to the sub-control board 90 (S2505). Note that, as the special figure 2 starting ball entry command, a part or all of the special figure 2 acquisition random number value read in S2503 may be directly transmitted to the sub-control board, or the special figure 2 acquisition random number value may be transmitted. May not be transmitted as it is, but may transmit game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information or the like) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number.

  Also, by analyzing the special figure 2 starting ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is determined whether or not the information is a jackpot-related information. The sub-control unit 90 can identify any one of these. In addition, in the first embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 starting ball entry command, whether the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when determined in the high probability state, It is possible to specify whether or not a big hit will occur if the judgment is made based on the probability state. Accordingly, the sub-control unit stores the received special figure 2 start ball entry command as a hold (production hold information), preliminarily determines the performance hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not it is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect suspension information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number value among the acquired random number values read in S2503 is not transmitted to the sub-control unit as it is, but the value of the other big hit type determination random number counter (big hit value) Command data including information indicating the type determination random number value, the value of the reach random number counter (reach random number value), the value of the fluctuating pattern random number counter (fluctuating pattern random number value), and information indicating the result of the preliminary determination It can be generated and set as a 2-start ball entry command.

  Next, in S2506, it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 1 spheres has increased by “1” as in the processing according to the special figure 2 described above (S2506). If it is determined in S2506 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S2506), the process proceeds to S2507. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved special figure 1 balls in S311 in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2506 that the number of special figure 1 reserved spheres has not increased (NO in S2506), the process ends.

  In S2507, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (S2507), and if it is determined that the time reduction flag is ON, that is, it is in the high base state (YES in S2507), the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2507 that the time reduction flag is OFF, that is, it is in the low base state (NO in S2507), the process proceeds to S2508 and the subsequent processes relating to the preliminary determination. Here, when the time reduction flag is ON, that is, when the current game state is the high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is activated, It is in a state where determination is easily performed. Further, in the first embodiment, as described later, the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed prior to the digestion of the special figure 1 reservation (variable display of the first special symbol). (So-called special figure 2 priority variable machine). In such a configuration, for example, the preliminary determination of Toku-zu 1 is performed, and the result is notified to the player by an effect such as a notice, and when it is specified that the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, the player: Using the priority of the special figure 2 reservation, the special figure 2 reservation is intentionally eliminated at an arbitrary timing (set to "0"), and the big hit according to the special figure 1 showing the result of the preliminary determination is intended. It is possible to perform technical intervention, such as causing the failure to occur. It is not preferable from the viewpoint of fairness of the game that the player can adjust the timing of occurrence of such a big hit. For this reason, when the current gaming state is not the low base state but the high base state (YES in S2507), this processing ends without performing the processing related to the advance determination of the special figure 1 after S2508.

  The processing of S2508 to S2510 is the same as the processing of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312) in the starting port sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the first special figure holding storage unit is read (S2508). Preliminary determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S2509), and the game information including at least the number-of-remaining-balls data pertaining to the first special symbol read out in S2501 and the information preliminarily determined in S2509 (priority determination information), It is generated as a special figure 1 start ball entry command, and is set in an output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 for transmitting a command to the sub control board 90 (S2510). Note that the preliminary determination (read ahead) of S2509 is performed prior to the hit / fail determination (S1603, S1609) in the special figure 1 hit / fail determination processing (S1207) described later.

[Power-off monitoring process]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S209) following the pending ball count process (S208). In the power-off monitoring process (S209), first, as shown in FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal has been input (S2601). This is determined based on a “power-off signal” transmitted when the above-described voltage drop monitoring circuit 105 detects a drop in the power supply voltage. If it is determined in S2601 that there is no input of the power supply voltage (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that a power-off signal has been input (YES in S2601), the game state information stored in the RAM of the main control unit 80 and the game state stored in the payout control unit 110 The information is stored in the backup area of each RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and thereafter the loop processing is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

  Further, at least the information indicating the set game mode (game mode setting information), the special symbol status flag, and the normal symbol status flag are set as the backup target game state information stored in the backup area when the power-off signal is received. , The value of the hold storage counter (special figure, ordinary figure), the value of the probability change flag, the value of the time saving flag, information indicating the progress of the big hit game, information indicating the progress of the small hit game, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol, Information indicating the number of unpaid prize balls can be given. These game state information is saved (stored and held) in a backup area (backup RAM) where power supply is maintained by a backup power supply. When the power supply is restarted after a power failure or the like occurs, the backed up game state information changes the control state (game state) to the control state (game state) at the time of the power failure or the like (before the power failure occurs). Information (data) necessary to restore the status

[Mode setting monitoring process]
Next, the mode setting monitoring process (S210) will be described with reference to FIG. This mode setting monitoring process is a process of constantly monitoring the setting state of the mode setting switch while the power is being supplied (after starting the game). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the setting of the game mode can be changed only when the power is turned on and only when the gaming machine is initialized. Even if the mode setting switch is operated (in the supply state), the game mode is not immediately changed. However, it is not preferable that the game mode actually set in the gaming machine does not match the game mode indicated by the operation unit 82a of the mode setting switch 82. Further, if there is such a mismatch, there is a possibility that a game clerk or the like may erroneously recognize the game mode set in the gaming machine when checking the setting of the gaming machine. For example, there is a possibility that a situation may occur in which, although a change is originally required, the user has mistakenly recognized that the change has already been made.

  In order to prevent such a situation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment always monitors the setting state (selection information) of the mode setting switch 82 (every predetermined control cycle) so that the above-described inconsistency can be avoided. By promptly detecting and performing a predetermined notification (error notification), it is possible to notify the surroundings. Specifically, in the mode setting monitoring process (S210), first, the selection information of the mode setting switch is read (S3201), and then, the game mode corresponding to the read selection information, the game mode stored in the RAM, That is, a comparison is made between the game mode currently set for the gaming machine and the game mode (S3202). In S3203, when it is determined that the result of the comparison performed in S3202 matches (YES in S3203), it is determined whether error notification is being performed (S3205), and when it is determined that error notification is not being performed (S3205), the process is performed. Finish. This is the case unless the setting state of the mode setting switch 82 is erroneously or incorrectly changed after the game is started.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3203 that the result of the comparison performed in S3202 does not match (NO in S3203), a predetermined error notification is performed (S3204), and the process ends. In the error notification, an error display indicating that “the mode setting switch has been illegally operated” is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, or a predetermined error notification is issued by the panel lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, or the speaker 67. It is possible to go. In the error notification, both the setting of the correct game mode and the game mode selected by the mode setting switch may be indicated in some form. Thus, the setting position of the game mode by the mode setting switch 82 can be quickly corrected (returned), and the error notification can be ended. Note that this error processing (error notification) is performed while maintaining a state in which the game can be continued. This is because the game mode cannot be changed (the game mode is not changed) unless the gaming machine is initialized.

  Also, during this error notification (during error processing), S3203 is executed again, and if it is determined that they match (YES in S3203), then it is determined whether or not error notification is being performed (S3205), and it is determined that error notification is being performed. If it has been performed (YES in S3205), the error notification ends (S3206), and the process ends. This makes it possible to return to a normal game without error notification. Thereby, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment monitors the operation of the mode setting switch 82 performed during the power supply, and based on the restored game state information while the power supply is stopped. By determining whether or not the game mode matches the game mode at the time of power interruption, monitoring can be performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game mode from being illegally or erroneously changed.

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 46 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. . As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller), etc., resetting of various flags, statuses, and counters are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process shifts to S4011. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the flow shifts to the processing in S4011 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, when the power-off signal is not ON, or when the contents of the RAM are not normal even when the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are normally maintained (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets various flags, statuses, and counter values. In S4011, an initial process for notifying a setting (notifying process) when a setting of a game mode described later is changed, and confirming operations (initial operations) of the movable decorative members 14, 17 (panel movable portion and frame movable portion). Is performed (S4011), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4004. Note that S4001 to S4003 and S4011 are executed only once (when the power is turned on) after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter.

  In S4004, the interrupt is prohibited. Next, a random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update processing (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. Note that the effect determination random numbers include an announcement effect determination random number that determines an announcement effect, and an effect design determination random number that determines an effect symbol. The method of updating the random numbers can be the same as the method of updating the random numbers performed by the main control board 80 described above. At the time of updating, instead of adding the random numbers one by one, two may be added. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. The timing may be, for example, when a control signal (start-in ball command) notifying that there is a start-in ball from the main control board 80, or a control signal (notification from the main control board 80 informing start of change). (A change start command) is transmitted, or a change effect pattern described later is determined. The storage location of the obtained effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In the first embodiment, a random number for determining a character announcement, a random number for determining a step-up notification, a random number for determining a pseudo-fluctuation notice, and a random number for determining a movable portion notice are provided as random numbers for the announcement effect determination. An announcement effect to be executed is determined using the acquired value of the effect determination random number and each announcement determination table.

  When the random number seed update processing (S4005) ends, a command transmission processing is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various effect devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) in accordance with the received command. An effect (effect design game effect, special game effect accompanying big hit game and small hit game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols and the like executed on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b) of the image display device 7, lighting control of various lamps, and operation of the movable decorative member are performed. It is possible to perform control, audio output control from a speaker, and the like.

[Initial processing]
Next, the initial processing (S4011) executed when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. The initial process (S4011) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and is executed only once (when the power is turned on) after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In the initial processing, mainly, the setting notification on the display screen 7a (the effect symbol display section 7b) when the setting is changed, and the initial operation of the movable decorative members 14, 17 (the frame movable section and the panel movable section). Is executed. Further, when the setting is changed, the execution timing of the setting notification is changed so that the visibility is not impaired by the initial operation of the movable decorative members 14 and 17 (the frame movable portion and the panel movable portion). The difference is made between the case where it is done and the case where it is not done.

  Specifically, in the initial processing (S4011), first, it is determined whether a setting change command has been received from the main control unit 80 (S4101). In S4101, when the setting change command is received, that is, when it is determined that the setting change has been performed under the control of the main control unit 80 (the setting change state has been set) (YES in S4101), the setting notification A setting notification command is transmitted (S4102), a frame movable initial operation start command for executing an initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is transmitted (S4103), and the process proceeds to S4104. By transmitting the setting notification command, the sub-control unit 90 executes the setting notification (setting change notification) on the display screen 7a (effect design display unit) via the image control unit 100 (image control board). Control for display. The mode of the setting notification (setting change notification) in this embodiment is as shown in FIG. 50A, and the setting change is performed by executing the character display of “Setting changed” for 5 seconds. It shows what was done. Further, instead of such an aspect, it may be specifically displayed which game mode has been set, which game mode has been changed to which game mode, and the like.

  In addition, by transmitting the frame movable initial operation start command, the sub-control unit 90 starts the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable unit) via the lamp control board 107. The movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is provided with a detected piece (not shown) that rotates with the rotating operation of the movable decorative member. The initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 is performed by controlling the driving of a driving source (stepping motor) to rotate the movable decorative member 17 by 1800 degrees (5 rotations) with the rotation axis as a fulcrum. The operation mode is a mode of stopping at a position detected by the sensor 17b (predetermined initial operation mode). Note that the execution period of the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 is completed in 8 seconds unless there is a malfunction (malfunction or malfunction of the sensor). In addition, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) simply rotates at the position where the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is installed. Therefore, the movable decorative member 17 does not move to a position overlapping the display screen 7a for performing setting notification in the process of performing the initial operation, that is, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 is changed to the setting notification (setting change). Notification) visibility is not impaired.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the setting notification and the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) executed after the power is turned on are executed in parallel (see FIG. 49A). In addition, by enabling these to be executed in parallel, the initial operation can be quickly completed (completed), the gaming machine can be quickly played, and the time required for the game store staff to confirm the initial processing can be reduced. It is possible to increase the operating rate of a gaming machine. Also, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable part) is such that at least a part of the movable decorative member 14 In order to pass (position or move) a position overlapping the display screen 7a displaying the setting notification, if the setting notification and the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 are performed simultaneously (in parallel), the setting There is a possibility that visibility of the notification may be impaired. Therefore, as will be described later, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable portion) is performed after executing the setting notification for a predetermined time (5 seconds) (after completing the setting notification). And When the board movable initial operation shown in FIG. 50 (b) is completed and the initial processing is completed, the display mode is changed to the display mode shown in FIG. 50 (c) and the game is enabled.

  In S4104, it is determined whether 5 seconds (specific notification time) has elapsed from the start of the setting notification. If it is determined that 5 seconds (specific notification time) has not elapsed (NO in S4104), the determination in S4104 is performed again. I do. Then, in S4104, when it is determined that the execution time (execution period) of the setting notification has passed 5 seconds (specific notification time) (YES in S4104), the process proceeds to S4105. It should be noted that a timer for measuring the execution time of the setting notification is provided, and whether or not the execution time of the setting notification has reached the specific notification time is determined by determining the time value of the timer. Further, in the present embodiment, 5 seconds is set as the specific notification time. However, if the game mode setter such as a game clerk is a time sufficient for reliably recognizing that the setting has been changed. , Other times (long or short). Also, during the period in which the setting notification is being executed, the frame movable initial operation is executed in parallel.

  In S4105, it is determined whether or not the frame movable initial operation executed in parallel with the setting notification has been completed (S4105). In the present embodiment, since the frame movable initial operation time (8 seconds) is set longer than the specific notification time (5 seconds), in the first determination, it is determined that the frame movable initial operation has not been completed. . In S4105, when it is determined that the frame movable initial operation has not been completed, that is, after executing the predetermined initial operation, it is determined that the detected object has not yet been detected by the origin sensor 17b (NO in S4105). It is determined whether or not a set time (a limit time defined for the frame movable initial operation) has elapsed from the start of the movable initial operation. This is because when a failure or a defect (breakage, foreign matter mixing, or the like) occurs in the drive source, the drive mechanism, the origin sensor, or the like, the detected piece is detected by the origin sensor 17b regardless of how much time has elapsed after the initial operation is started. In other words, the initial operation may not be completed.

  In order to prevent such a situation, a time longer than the frame movable initial operation time (8 seconds) defined for the frame movable initial operation is determined as a set time (limit time), and this set time (in the present embodiment, If the frame movable initial operation is not completed even after elapse of 12 seconds), an error notification is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process. Specifically, when it is determined in S4107 that the set time (12 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the frame movable initial operation (YES in S4107), a frame movable error notification is executed (S4108), and the process proceeds to S4106. In the frame movable error notification, a character “frame movable error” is displayed on the display screen 7a to notify that the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) has some problem.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4107 that the set time (12 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the initial frame movable operation (NO in S4107), it is determined again whether the initial frame movable operation has been completed (S4105). If it is determined that the frame movable initial operation has been completed after performing the determination in S4105 a plurality of times (YES in S4105), then a board movable initial operation start command is transmitted (S4106), and the process proceeds to S4109. That is, after the setting notification of the specific setting notification time has been completed and the frame movable initial operation has been completed (or the set time has elapsed without being completed), the panel movable initial operation is started. Thereby, before performing the board movable initial operation which becomes a state of covering a part of the display portion of the display screen 7a, the setting notification of the specific notification time (5 seconds) and the frame movable initial operation can be ended. It becomes. This also prevents the visibility of the setting notification indicating that the setting has been changed from being hindered by the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable portion), and reliably notifies that the setting has been changed. It is possible to do.

  In addition, since the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is completed before the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable portion), the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable portion) is completed. Before the start of the operation, the time for setting notification is ensured, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 and the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 are separately executed, and the respective initial operations can be reliably executed. Further, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of a situation in which a large number of movable decorative members 14 and 17 operate simultaneously and drive power is insufficient. In addition, the frame movable initial operation that does not hinder the visibility of the setting notification can be executed in parallel after the setting notification, so that the initial processing is completed as quickly as possible, and the game can be quickly played. To make things possible.

  In S4109, it is determined whether or not the panel movable initial operation has been completed (S4109), and it is determined that the initial operation has not been completed, that is, that the detection target piece has not been detected by the origin sensor 14b after the execution of the predetermined initial operation. If this has been done (NO in S4109), it is then determined whether or not a set time (limit time set for the initial operation of the panel movable) has elapsed from the start of the initial operation of the panel movable. In the same manner as in the above-described frame movable initial operation, when a failure or a defect (breakage, foreign matter mixing, etc.) occurs in the driving source, the driving mechanism, the origin sensor, or the like, how much time elapses after the initial operation starts. This is also because the detected piece is not detected by the origin sensor 17b, that is, the initial operation may not be completed.

  In order to prevent such a situation, a time longer than the board movable initial operation time (6 seconds) defined for the board movable initial operation is determined as a set time (limit time), and this set time (in this embodiment, If the panel movable initial operation is not completed even after elapse of 9 seconds), an error notification is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process. Specifically, in S4110, when it is determined that the set time (9 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the board movable initial operation (YES in S4110), a board movable error notification is executed (S4111), and the initial processing ends. The board movable error notification displays the characters "board movable error" on the display screen 7a to notify that there is some problem in the movable decorative member 14 (board movable portion). On the other hand, if it is determined in S4109 that the initial operation of moving the board has been completed (YES in S4109), the initial processing is terminated.

  The timing chart shown in FIG. 49A (with setting change: initial processing) is a diagram showing the approximate timing of the initial processing executed when it is determined that the setting change command has been received in S4101. According to this, the setting notification (t1 → t2) and the frame movable initial operation (t1 → t3) are executed (started) in parallel, and after both the setting notification and the frame movable initial operation are completed, the panel movable initial operation is performed. (T4 → t5) is started.

  If it is determined in S4101 that the setting change command has not been received, that is, it is determined that the setting has not been changed under the control of the main control unit 80 (the state has not been changed to the setting change state) (NO in S4101), An initial process when the setting is not changed is executed [the process when no setting is changed (S4112)], and the process is ended. When the setting change command is not received, the sub-control unit 90 does not perform the setting notification on the display screen 7a. This makes it possible to quickly end the initial processing when there is no change in the setting of the game mode.

  In the process without setting change (S4112), first, a frame movable initial operation start command for executing an initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is transmitted (S4201), and then, the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable). (S4202), and the process proceeds to S4203. By S4201 and S4202, the movable decorative member 14 and the movable decorative member 17 start the initial operation in parallel. If it is determined that the setting change command has not been received (the setting change state has not been set), the setting notification is not performed on the display screen 7a that is controlled by the sub-control unit. , The frame movable initial operation and the panel movable initial operation are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

  This is because the setting notification is not performed on the display screen 7a, and even if the board movable initial operation that can cover the display screen 7a is immediately started, the visibility of the setting notification is not hindered. As a result, the initial processing (initial operation) executed when the setting of the game mode has not been changed can be quickly terminated, and the game can be brought into a playable state as quickly as possible. In S4203, it is determined whether or not the frame movable initial operation has been completed (S4203). If it is determined that the frame movable initial operation has not been completed (NO in S4203), then a set time (limit time) has elapsed from the start of the frame movable initial operation. It is determined whether it is (S4204). In S4204, when it is determined that the set time has not elapsed, it is determined whether the frame movable initial operation has been completed again, and when it is determined that the set time has elapsed, the frame movable error notification is executed, and S4206 Move to the processing of. Further, these processes (S4203 to S4205, S4206 to S4208) are the same as the processes executed when the above-described setting change command is received. If it is determined in S4206 that the initial operation of moving the board has been completed (YES in S4206), the process ends.

  FIG. 49B is a diagram showing the approximate timing of the initial processing executed when it is determined in S4101 that the setting change command has not been received in the timing chart shown in [No setting change: initial processing]. According to this, the setting notification is not executed, the frame movable initial operation (t6 → t8) and the panel movable initial operation (t6 → t7) are executed (started) in parallel, and the frame movable initial operation and the panel movable initial operation are performed. Indicate that the initial processing is terminated after both of these steps have been completed.

[Other Embodiment 1 of Initial Processing]
Next, another mode 1 of the initial process will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 53 (AA). A description of parts common to the above-described initial processing of the first embodiment will be omitted, and differences will be described. In the embodiment of the first embodiment described above, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable initial operation) is performed after both the setting notification and the frame movable initial operation are completed. Instead of this mode, in another mode 1, the board movable initial operation is started (without waiting for the end of the frame movable initial operation) after the setting notification of the specific notification time (5 seconds) is completed. It was.

  More specifically, S4151 to S4154 of the other aspect 1 (S4011) of the initial processing shown in FIG. 51 are the same as the initial processing of the first embodiment, and thus description thereof will be omitted. In S4154, when it is determined that the specific notification time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the setting notification (YES in S4154), then a board movable initial operation start command is transmitted (S4155), and the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 is performed. Start. Then, in steps S4156 to S4158, end processing of the frame movable initial operation is performed, and in steps S4159 to S4160, end processing of the panel movable initial operation is performed. Thus, as shown in FIG. 53 (AA) [setting changed: initial processing], after the setting notification (tt1 → tt2) for a predetermined period (5 seconds) is completed, the frame movable initial operation (tt1 → tt4) is performed. If it is being executed, the board movable initial operation (tt3 → tt5) is started in parallel with the frame movable initial operation without waiting for the end of the frame movable initial operation, and the frame movable initial operation and the board movable initial operation are performed. Is completed, the initial processing ends. This makes it possible to end the initial processing as soon as possible without interrupting the visibility of the setting notification due to the board movable initial operation and to bring the gaming machine into a playable state.

[Other Embodiment 2 of Initial Processing]
Next, another mode 2 of the initial process will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53 (AAA). A description of parts common to the other aspects described above will be omitted, and differences will be described. In the first embodiment and the other aspect 1, when the setting notification for the specific notification period (5 seconds) ends, the setting notification ends, and the process proceeds to another process. Instead of this mode, in another mode 2, after the setting notification for the specific notification period (5 seconds) is executed, the setting notification is continued, and other initial processing (frame movable initial operation and / or board The setting notification is ended in accordance with the end of the movable initial operation. Thus, the setting notification enables the setting person or the like in the game mode to reliably perform the setting notification.

  More specifically, S4151 to S4154 of the second embodiment (S4011) of the initial process shown in FIG. 52 are the same as the initial process of the other embodiment 1, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. Here, in S4154, when it is determined that the specific notification time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the setting notification (YES in S4154), the setting notification is not terminated and is continued (even if the display mode is changed). No problem), a panel movable initial operation start command for starting the panel movable initial operation is transmitted (S4155). Steps S4156 to S4161 are the same as those in the initial processing of the other embodiment 1, and thus description thereof is omitted. In another embodiment 2, when it is determined in S4159 that the board movable initial operation has been completed (YES in S4159), a setting notification end command for ending the setting notification on the display screen 7a that has been continuously executed. Is transmitted (S4162), and the initial processing ends. That is, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 (AAA) [setting changed: initial processing], the setting notification (s1 → s5) and the frame movable initial operation (s1 → s4) are started in parallel and After performing the setting notification for the specific notification period (5 seconds), the panel movable initial operation (s3 → s5) is started. Then, even after starting the board movable initial operation, the setting notification is continued on the display screen 7a, and the board movable initial operation (the frame movable initial operation and the panel movable initial operation) is completed (as a trigger). It is assumed that the setting notification ends and the initial processing ends.

  As a result, the execution time of the setting notification is extended without extending the execution time of the initial processing, and the setting notification can be reliably performed by the game mode setter or the like. Also, in the board movable initial operation, the movable decorative member 14 covers a part of the display screen 7a in a part of the initial operation, but does not cover the entire display screen 7a, and always covers the entire display screen 7a. I don't know. Therefore, if the setting notification is performed during the panel movable initial operation, there is a timing at which the visibility of the setting notification is hindered, but there is also a timing at which the setting notification becomes visible, so that the setting notification can be performed effectively. It is. In addition, before the start of the panel movable initial operation, an institution that performs setting notification without obstructing visibility is also secured, so that setting notification that is easy to recognize can be performed more reliably. In addition, this makes it possible to end the initial processing as soon as possible without interrupting the visibility of the setting notification due to the board movable initial operation, and to set the gaming machine in a playable state.

[Other aspects of initial processing]
Further, both the frame movable initial operation and the panel movable initial operation may be started after the end of the setting notification (after the lapse of the specific notification time). Thereby, it is possible to surely notify the setting notification without fear that the visibility of the setting notification is hindered by the operation of the decorative movable member. At this time, the frame movable initial operation and the board movable initial operation may be performed in parallel, or one of them may be performed first and the other may be performed later. In addition, the initial operation of the movable decorative member means that the detection sensor for controlling the operation (driving source or operating mechanism) and the position of the movable decorative member is inspected at power-on for a defect or failure, or when the power is turned on. This is an operation for moving (positioning) the movable decorative member to the initial position (origin position) at the time of starting the game. Such a process is also called an origin return operation.

  In the mode setting process (S3101) following the power-on initialization process (see FIG. 14), the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment determines whether the initialization flag is ON, and determines whether the initialization flag is ON. When it is ON, that is, when the gaming machine is initialized (RAM initialized) and started (started), the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is read, and the game mode corresponding to the selection information is set. Change is possible. On the other hand, when the initialization flag is not ON, that is, when the game state (control state) at the time of power failure is restored based on the game state information stored in the backup area (161, 162), the mode setting switch 82 is also set. The process of reading the selection information is performed. Then, as a result of performing the recovery processing based on the game state information stored in the backup area (161, 162), the game mode at the time of power failure stored in the RAM of the main control unit 80 and the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 When the game mode corresponding to the game mode is different, the setting of the game mode is not changed, and an error process (error notification) is executed. Until the error processing is completed, that is, until the match is determined in the match determination, the game is not started without shifting to the interrupt processing (S105).

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, although the effect against fraud is extremely high, the operation rate of the gaming machine may be reduced due to the fact that the game is not started until it is determined that there is a match. Therefore, in the mode setting process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment is similar to the first embodiment only when the initialization flag is ON when the power is turned on, that is, only when the gaming machine is initialized and started up. The selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is read, and the setting can be changed to the game mode corresponding to the selection information. On the other hand, when the initialization flag is OFF, unlike the first embodiment, the mode setting process is terminated as it is. Thereby, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the gaming machine, the setting of the game mode can be changed, and when the power is turned on without the initialization of the gaming machine, the setting of the game mode cannot be changed. However, even if the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is changed, such a situation is not monitored and no error processing is performed. As a result, the game is started in the same game mode as that at the time of power interruption restored when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, in the mode setting process (S106) of the second embodiment, first, whether the initialization flag is ON, that is, the RAM (161, 162) is operated by operating the RAM clear switch 83 when the power is turned on. It is determined whether has been initialized (S3191). If it is determined in S3191 that the initialization flag is ON (YES in S3191), the selection information of the mode setting switch is read (S3192), the game mode corresponding to the read selection information is set (S3193), and the processing is performed. Finish. As described above, when the game machine is started up by operating the RAM clear switch when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM including the backup area, the selection information (setting change operation) of the mode setting switch is made valid. This allows the game mode to be changed (set). On the other hand, if it is determined in S3191 that the initialization flag is not ON (NO in S3191), the process ends. Note that the game modes that can be set by this mode setting process are the same as the game modes 1 to 5 in the first embodiment. Other than that, the structure and control processing of the gaming machine are the same as those of the first embodiment, and therefore the description is omitted.

  As a result, in the state where the game is started, the game mode corresponding to the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 may be different from the actual game mode set in the gaming machine. However, since the setting of the game mode can be changed only when the power is turned on with the initialization of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the setting of the game mode from being changed (illegally) as much as possible. In addition, by enabling the game to be started, it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the gaming machine from being reduced. Also, after the start of the game, the mismatch between the actually set game mode and the game mode selected by the mode setting switch 82 is monitored by executing the mode setting monitoring process of the first embodiment. It is also possible.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine of the first embodiment can set an arbitrary game mode selected from the game modes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 9 by operating the mode setting switch 82 under a specific change condition. And The gaming machine according to the third embodiment selects and determines a gaming mode in a selection mode different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, the gaming machine of the third embodiment includes three (multiple) game mode selection means (game mode setting means) as game mode selection means for selecting a game mode. First, similarly to the first embodiment, using the mode setting switch 82, a game mode setter selects and sets an arbitrary game mode from a plurality of game modes (first game mode selecting means). Mode selection means). Secondly, game mode random selection means (second game mode selection means, random selection means) for randomly selecting and setting a game mode from a plurality of predetermined game modes is provided. Thirdly, game mode fixed selection means (third game mode selection means, specific probability selection means) for setting the game mode to a predetermined specific game mode is provided.

  The gaming machine according to the third embodiment includes (is mounted on) a setting seed switch 820 on the main control board 80 as shown in FIG. Then, under a specific condition, an arbitrary setting type (game mode selection means) can be selected by sliding the operation unit 820a of the setting type switch 820 in the left-right direction. Specifically, when [A] at the left end is selected on the operation unit 820a, the game mode selection unit (first game mode selection unit) is selected as the game mode selection unit. When the center [B] is selected on the operation unit 820a, a game mode random selection unit (second game mode selection unit) is selected as the game mode selection unit. In addition, when [C] at the right end is selected on the operation unit 820a, the game mode fixed selection means (third game mode selection means) is selected as the game mode selection means.

  When a game mode optional hand is selected as the game mode selection means, a game mode setter such as a game clerk can set an arbitrary game mode, so the game store side considers the profit balance. It is necessary to set and arrange game machines in a high setting game mode with a high jackpot probability and game machines in a low setting game mode with a low jackpot probability in a well-balanced manner. Also, when the game mode random selection means is selected as the game mode selection means, the game mode setter such as a game clerk cannot know which game mode is set, and the game store side Makes it difficult to manage profits. However, for the player, since a high setting game mode may be set, the player's expectation, gaming interest, and gambling are improved, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is improved, and It is also possible to increase the profit of the company. When the game mode fixed selection means is selected as the game mode selection means, a predetermined specific game mode is set. In the third embodiment, when the game mode fixed selection unit is selected in consideration of the profit balance between the game store side and the player side, the game mode 2 which is an intermediate setting is set. Thus, it is difficult for the game store to obtain a large profit, but it is possible to obtain a relatively well-balanced profit without obtaining a large loss. On the other hand, from the player's perspective, it is unlikely that the profit or loss will be excessive, and it is possible to play a well-balanced and appropriate gambling gaming machine.

  Next, a mode setting process (S106) according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. A description of the same portions as those in the mode setting process (S106) of the first embodiment illustrated in FIG. 14 will be omitted. In the mode setting process (S106) of the third embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag is ON (S3101). NO), and proceeds to the process of S3112. The processes in S3112 to S3119 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is ON, that is, that the game state information has been initialized by performing a predetermined input operation on the RAM clear switch (YES in S3101), then the mode setting key is It is determined whether it is ON, that is, whether the mode setting lock unit 92 is ON (S3102). If it is determined in S3102 that the mode setting lock unit 92 is in the OFF state, that is, if the setting key has not been operated (NO in S3102), the process proceeds to S3111. The processing in S3111 is the same as that in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated.

  In S3102, if it is determined that the mode setting lock unit 92 is in the ON state, that is, it is determined that the setting key has been operated (YES in S3102), then a random number for setting change is obtained (S3149), and the mode in S3150 The process proceeds to the setting process 2 (S3150). Here, the “setting change random number” is a random number used when the game mode random selection unit is selected as the game mode selection unit. The setting change random number is configured by a counter value updated at a predetermined cycle after the power is turned on, and the value of the counter obtained at the execution timing of S3149 is referred to as a setting change random value.

  In the mode setting process 2 (S3150), first, the selection information of the setting type switch is read (S3151), and then it is determined whether or not the setting type selected by the setting type switch 820 is the setting type A (game mode arbitrary selection means). Yes (S3152). The CPU of the main control unit 80 determines the setting type selected by the operation unit 820a of the setting type switch 820. In S3152, if it is determined that the setting type selected by the operation unit 820a of the setting type switch 820 is [A] (YES in S3152), a setting type A flag indicating that the game mode has been set by the game mode arbitrary selecting means. Is set to ON (S3152), and the process shifts to S3154. The processes of S3154 to S3159, specifically, the process of setting the game mode to the “changed game mode state” and setting an arbitrary game mode during that period are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted. As a result, a game mode setter such as a game clerk operates the operation section 82a of the mode setting switch 82 to set an arbitrary game mode selected from the game modes 1 to 5.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3152 that the setting type selected by the setting type switch 820 is not the setting type A (NO in S3152), then the setting type selected by the setting type switch 820 is changed to the setting type B (game Mode random selection means) is determined (S3162). If it is determined in S3162 that the setting type selected by the operation unit 820a of the setting type switch 820 is [B] (YES in S3162), a setting type B flag indicating that the game mode has been set by the game mode random selection means. Is turned on (S3163), and the process shifts to S3164. In S3164, the game mode is set based on the random number for setting change acquired in S3149 (S3164), and information indicating that the game mode is set randomly by the game mode random selection means is displayed on the information display section 88. (S3165), and the process proceeds to S3169. As a result, a game mode randomly selected from the game modes 1 to 5 is set regardless of the intention of the game mode setter such as a game clerk.

  Here, “the game mode is set based on the acquired setting change random number value” means that the setting change random number is composed of values from 0 to 99, and the acquired setting change random number value is from 0 to 99. In the case of 19, the game mode is set to 1, the setting change random number is 20 to 39, the game mode 2 is set, and when the obtained setting change random value is 40 to 59, the game mode 3 is set. If the set and obtained setting change random number is 60 to 79, the game mode 4 is set, and if the obtained setting change random value is 80 to 99, the game mode 5 is set. The “information indicating that the information is set at random” to be displayed in S3165 is, for example, the character “RAND” (indicating random) is displayed using the 7-segment display unit of the first to fourth information display units. You may. Also, in the case of random setting, the set game mode is not displayed because a game clerk or the like confirms that the game mode is set to a disadvantageous game mode and sets the game mode to a game mode that is convenient for the user. This is to prevent the power from being turned ON / OFF many times until the random setting is repeated. This makes it possible to maintain fairness between the player and the game store when the game mode is set by the game mode random selection means.

  If it is determined in S3162 that the setting type selected by the operation unit 820a of the setting type switch 820 is not [B], that is, the selected setting type is [C] (NO in S3162), the game mode is fixed. The setting type C flag indicating that the game mode has been set by the selection means is turned ON (S3166), and the processing shifts to S3167. In S3167, the game mode 2 which is a predetermined fixed game mode is set (S3167), the set game mode (game mode 2) is displayed on the information display section 88 (S3168), and the process proceeds to S3169. . Note that the display mode of the information display unit is [−−F2], and F is information indicating a fixed FIX. As a result, a game mode setter such as a game clerk cannot select an arbitrary game mode, and the game mode 2 is forcibly set.

  In S3169, it is determined whether the mode setting key is OFF, that is, whether the setting key inserted into the mode setting lock unit has been returned to the OFF position (S3169), and when it is determined that the mode setting key has been returned to the OFF position (YES in S3169). Then, the process proceeds to S3160. If it is determined in S3169 that the player has not returned to the OFF position (NO in S3169), the process of S43169 is repeatedly executed and the game does not shift to the “game-possible state”. In S3160, the mode change flag is turned off to end the "game mode change state" (S3160), the above-described setting change flag is turned on (S3161), a setting type specifying command is set (S3170), and the process ends.

  Here, in the third embodiment, it is determined by the “setting change flag” that the backed up game state information has been deleted (initialized) and the setting of the game mode has been changed. It is possible to determine which setting type has changed the setting of the game mode. In the third embodiment, which setting type has set the game mode is notified based on the “setting type specifying command”. As described above, the display mode on the information display section 88 when the game mode is set is made different depending on which setting type the game mode is set. , It is possible to confirm which setting type has been set.

  Further, it is assumed that the player is notified of which setting type the game mode has been set by the “setting type specifying command”. For example, using a frame lamp, a board lamp, or an image display device provided on the front side of the gaming machine, the setting type can be notified in a notification mode in which the setting type can be specified (predictable). For example, by changing the light emission color, light emission pattern, blinking speed, etc. of the lamp, changing the background color, background type, display characters, characters, etc. of the liquid crystal, and changing the sound output from the speaker, It is possible to specify (predict) which setting type the game mode has been set. In addition, the notification mode in which the set type can be specified is to be continued at least after the game mode setting is changed until the game is started (the first special symbol change display). Alternatively, the “setting type specifying command” may be transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing, and a notification that can specify the setting type by a display unit or a speaker controlled by the sub-control unit 90 may be performed. As a matter of course, the display that can be controlled by the main control unit 80 may provide a notification that can specify the type of setting.

  As another mode, at least after changing the setting of the game mode, the game may be continued until a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) of the special symbol change display is executed. Further, as another aspect, at least after changing the setting of the game mode, the game mode may be continued until a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) elapses. In addition, these modes may be combined, and the notification may be ended based on the condition that has been satisfied earlier. As a result, if there is a gaming machine whose setting has been changed, it is possible to notify a player who initially plays the gaming machine after the opening of the gaming store of which setting type of the gaming machine has changed the setting. It becomes. As a result, the player can select a gaming machine to be played by himself based on the information, and can increase the number of players immediately after opening.

  As described above, the operation of the setting type switch 820 is performed with the power turned off. Then, the power is turned on in a state where an arbitrary setting type (A to C) is selected by operating the operation unit 820a. Thereby, it is possible to select a game mode by an arbitrary setting type. Incidentally, in order to change the setting of the game mode with an arbitrary setting type, as in the first embodiment, the setting type is selected in a state where the power is OFF, the mode setting lock is turned ON, and the RAM is set. The power needs to be turned on while the clear switch is turned on.

  This makes it possible to set the game mode in a variety of modes, and the player can also increase the interest in selecting a gaming machine to be played according to the setting mode of the game store. This also enhances the entertainment interest of the game.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Although the gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes a notification unit that notifies a power-on mode (initialization is not changed, setting is changed with initialization, or setting is not changed without initialization), the notification of the notification unit is provided. The mode was mainly for a game clerk who is a power-on user. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, in addition to this, it is possible to notify the player of the power-on mode (initialization without setting change, initialization with setting change, or initialization without setting change).

  As shown in the power-on notification processing (S107) of the fourth embodiment in FIG. 58, in this processing, after S5102, a display command for notifying that "initialized but the setting has not been changed" is output. It is set (S5108), and the process proceeds to S5103. After S5106, a display command for notifying that “initialization and setting change have been made” is set (S5109), and the process shifts to S5103. Further, following S5107, a display command for notifying that “the initialization has not been performed and the setting has not been changed (the game state information has been restored)” is set (S5110), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5103. ing. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated.

  In the fourth embodiment, a display command for notifying that “initialized but the setting has not been changed” and a notification that “initialized and setting changed” have been performed by a control process (not shown). Or a display command for notifying that “the initialization has not been performed and the setting has not been changed (the game state information has been restored)”, at a predetermined timing, The display unit or the speaker controlled by the sub-control unit 90 may provide a notification capable of specifying the power-on mode. That is, different notification modes are executed depending on the power-on mode. As a matter of course, the display that can be controlled by the main control unit 80 may provide a notification that can specify the type of setting.

  In addition, in order to notify the player, this notification mode is to be continued at least after the setting of the game mode is changed until the game is started (the first special symbol change display). As another mode, at least after changing the setting of the game mode, the game may be continued until a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) of the special symbol change display is executed. Further, as another aspect, at least after changing the setting of the game mode, the game mode may be continued until a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) elapses. In addition, these modes may be combined, and the notification may be ended based on the condition that has been satisfied earlier. As a result, if there is a gaming machine whose setting has been changed, it is possible to notify a player who initially plays the gaming machine after the opening of the gaming store of which setting type of the gaming machine has changed the setting. It becomes. As a result, the player can select a gaming machine to be played by himself based on the information, and can increase the number of players immediately after opening.

  As another mode, an operation switch (not shown) is provided, and a game clerk or the like can operate the operation switch (operation unit) to set whether to notify the player of the power-on mode or not. It may be.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The circuit configuration of the fifth embodiment (mainly, the main control board 80, the payout control board 90, and the power supply board 109) is partially different from the circuit configuration of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The circuit configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59, focusing on differences from the first embodiment. The description of the parts common to the first embodiment is omitted.

  In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, a power supply board 109 for supplying drive power to a main control board 80, a payout control board 110, and other control boards (sub-control board 90, image control board 100) and the like is provided. Have. In the first embodiment, by performing a predetermined input operation on the power supply board 109, the storage contents of the backup area provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 and the backup area provided in the RAM of the payout control unit 110 are erased. A RAM clear switch 83 is provided for initialization. In the fifth embodiment, instead of this, the RAM clear and mode setting switch 830 (also referred to as a “specific switch”) having both the function of the RAM clear switch 83 of the first embodiment and the function of the mode setting switch 82 of the first embodiment is used. ). Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the main control board 80 is not provided with the mode setting switch 82 for changing the setting of the game mode (setting a predetermined game mode) (see FIG. 59).

  The RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is a push-type switch, and has the same structure as the RAM clear switch 83 of the first embodiment. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the RAM clear switch of the first embodiment has both the function of the RAM clear switch and the function of the mode setting switch. As a result, it is possible to reduce the cost and increase the number of common parts (common parts) of the board and its mounted parts as much as possible between a gaming machine having a game mode setting function and a gaming machine having no game mode setting function. Will be able to

  Further, the main control board 80 (main control unit) and the payout control board 110 (payout control unit) of the fifth embodiment have backup areas 161 and 162 in the RAM, respectively, as in the first embodiment. The backup area 161 of the main control board 80 and the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 are backed up by a backup power supply (backup voltage) of the power supply unit of the power supply board 109. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine is stopped due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power-off operation, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine is stopped for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply) even after the stoppage. The contents (game state information) of the backup target (storage storage target) stored in these RAMs are stored (storage storage). A unit that stores and retains the backup target information (data) stored in the backup areas 161 and 162 by the backup power supply is referred to as a “storage retaining unit”. The means for storing and holding the backup target information (data) stored in the backup area 161 of the main control board 80 is called “first storage holding means”, and the backup target information (data) stored in the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 The means for storing and holding the data is referred to as “second storage and holding means”. Also, the backup target information (data) stored and retained is provided as a backup target information save area in the RAM of each of the control boards 80 and 110.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59, the backup area 161 of the main control board 80 includes an initialization area 171 including the first game information storage section, a non-initialization area 172 including the setting storage section 174 and the base storage section 175, and have. The initialization area 171 and / or the non-initialization area 172 may have other areas. The initialization area 171 erases the backup target information (data) stored (held) by an operator such as a game clerk operating the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 in a predetermined manner. It is an area that can be initialized. That is, the initialization area 171 is an area in which the area can be initialized by an operator. By initializing, the player can start the game on the initialized gaming machine under the same conditions (hold 0, no special symbols and ordinary symbols on hold and no fluctuation display, low-accuracy low base state, etc.). It becomes possible.

  The non-initialization area 172 is an area where the backup target information (data) cannot be erased even if the operator such as a game clerk operates the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830. That is, the non-initialized area 172 is an area where the area cannot be initialized by the operator. Note that, even in the non-initialized area 172, if information (data) stored in the non-initialized area 172 has an abnormality, a part or all of the information is initialized. This is an area that cannot be initialized using a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear / mode setting switch 830). Therefore, when the initialization is performed using the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830, the initialization target (erasing target) can be only the information stored in the initialization area.

  Further, the main control board 80 includes a first game information storage unit 173 as an initialization area 171. The first game information storage unit 173 stores at least data indicating a game state (special symbol / normal symbol pass / fail determination probability (high probability or low probability), a base state (high base state or low base state)), Data indicating the number of symbol holdings, data indicating special symbol holding information (judgment results, change patterns, etc.), data indicating the number of ordinary symbol holds, data indicating normal symbol hold information (judgment results, changing patterns, etc.), special Data indicating the result of determining whether a symbol / regular symbol is accepted, the remaining period of the high probability state, the remaining period of the high base state, etc., that is, data according to the control state of the main control unit (special symbol status flag, ordinary symbol status flag, The value of the hold storage counter, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are stored. The data stored in the first game information storage unit is called "game information". The data stored in the first game information storage unit 173 is stored and backed up (backed up) by a storage and storage unit (first storage and storage unit) when a decrease in the power supply voltage is detected, and the data is restored when the power supply is restored. Then, the stored data is restored. This data recovery means is referred to as "game information recovery means (first game information recovery means)".

  Further, the main control board 80 includes a setting storage unit 174 and a base storage unit 175 as a non-initialization area 172. The setting storage unit 174 stores information indicating the set game mode (also referred to as “game mode information” or “setting information”). The base storage unit 175 stores the base described in the first embodiment. Information (base values (first base value, second base value) is stored. The data (setting information) stored in the setting storage unit 174 is stored when a decrease in the power supply voltage is detected. The data (setting information) is stored and backed up (backed up) by the holding unit (second storage and holding unit), and the data (setting information) stored and restored is restored when the power is restored. The data (base information) stored in the base storage unit 175 is stored by the storage holding unit (third storage holding unit) when a decrease in the power supply voltage is detected. Is di (backup), with the power recovery, the storage holding data (base data) is restored. The data recovery method referred to as "gaming information recovery means (3 gaming information recovery means)".

  Further, as described above, the setting information stored in the setting storage unit 174 and the base information stored in the base storage unit 175 are stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 by operating the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830. Even if it is initialized, it is not erased (not initialized). That is, it is excluded from the target of the initialization operation. The setting information stored in the setting storage unit 174 can be changed by performing a predetermined setting change operation, but the base information stored in the base storage unit 175 can be changed. Unless an error occurs, the operator cannot arbitrarily change (initialize).

  Similarly to the above-described initialization area 171, the initialization area 176 of the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 can be arbitrarily set by the operator such as a game clerk in a predetermined manner by the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830. Is an area in which the stored backup target information (data) can be erased and initialized. That is, when the operator arbitrarily operates the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 in a predetermined mode, both the initialization area 171 of the main control board 80 and the initialization area 176 of the payout control board 110 are initialized. The initialization regions are both initialized. From this, the player can start playing the initialized gaming machine under the same conditions (hold 0, no special symbols and ordinary symbols on hold and no fluctuation display, low-accuracy low base state, prize ball, etc.). It becomes possible.

  The backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 has an initialization area 176 including a second game information storage unit 177. Note that the initialization area 176 may have another area, or the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110, a non-initialization area for storing information not to be initialized (information on game profits and prize balls). May be provided. The second game information storage unit 177 stores at least data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls (unpaid prize ball information). The data stored in the second game information storage unit is referred to as “game information”, “prize ball information”, and “game profit information”. The data stored in the second game information storage unit 177 is stored and backed up (backed up) by a storage and storage unit (fourth storage and storage unit) when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected, and the data is restored when the power supply is restored. Then, the stored data is restored. This data recovery means is referred to as "game information recovery means (fourth game information recovery means)".

  Here, when only the power switch 84 is turned on in a state where power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment (power OFF state), a power supply voltage is supplied to the power supply board 109 and the power supply board 109 is supplied. Supplies necessary drive power to various control boards. Then, information (data) when the power is turned off (when the power is reduced) is normally stored (stored and held) in the respective backup areas (the first game information storage unit, the setting storage unit, the base storage unit, and the second game information storage unit). ) Is performed (when there is no abnormality in the backup data), based on the information (data), the power-off (power-down) state (game state) is restored, and then the game can be performed. (This is also referred to as "game state restoring means", "game information restoring means", or "game state information restoring means"). On the other hand, when the power switch 84 is turned on while the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is pressed and operated for a predetermined period, the power switch 84 is turned on (switching from OFF to ON). The input information (RAM clear signal) of the mode setting switch 830 is input to the main control unit 80 and the payout control unit 110, and the initialization areas 171 and 176 (first game) of the backup area (main control unit 80 and payout control unit 110) If there is information (data) stored in the information storage unit and the second game information storage unit), the information (data) stored in the initialization areas 171 and 176 is erased, initialized, and the game is possible. (This is also called “game information initialization means”). Thereby, it becomes possible to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an initial state.

  Also, by operating the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 in the above-described predetermined mode to perform initialization (initialization operation), the first game information stored and held by the storage holding unit (first storage holding unit). Game information in the storage unit 173 (information indicating the result of the special symbol hit determination) and the game information in the second game information storage unit 177 (unpaid prize balls) stored and held by the storage holding unit (fourth storage holding unit). Information), the setting information of the setting storage unit 174 stored and held by the storage holding unit (second storage holding unit), and the base of the base storage unit 175 stored and held by the storage holding unit (third storage holding unit). The information can be restored and initialized.

  The method of changing the game mode (change operation method) in the fifth embodiment is substantially the same as that in the first embodiment. However, the fifth embodiment does not include a mode setting switch on the main control board 80. Since the game mode is set (set operation) using the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 on the board 109, the method is partially different. Hereinafter, a method of changing the game mode according to the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

  First, with the power of the pachinko gaming machine turned off, a setting key (not shown) is inserted into the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89, and the setting key is operated (rotated) from the OFF position to the ON position. The setting lock unit 89 is turned ON. Next, the power switch 84 is turned from OFF to ON while the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is being pressed (while being pressed) while the power is OFF and the setting key is operated to the ON position. I do. That is, the power is turned on while both the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 and the mode setting lock unit 89 are turned on. As a result, power is supplied to the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is activated to enter a “game mode change state” in which the game mode setting can be changed to an arbitrary setting.

  When there is the setting information of the setting storage unit 174 stored and held by the storage holding unit (second storage holding unit), a value indicating the game mode corresponding to the setting information is displayed on the information display unit 88. In the "game mode change state", when changing the game mode displayed on the information display section 88, that is, the currently set game mode, the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is pressed. For example, when the currently set game mode is the game mode 3, the information display section 88 displays a message like [−−− 3]. Then, when the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is pressed once in this state, the display mode of the information display section 88 is changed to [−−− 4]. Thereafter, every time the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is pressed once, the display changes in the order of [−−− 5] → [−−− 1] → [−−− 2] → [−−− 3]. I do. Then, the game mode is determined and set by returning the setting key from the ON position to the OFF position while an arbitrary game mode (for example, game mode 4) of the operator is displayed on the information display section 88. . As a result, the game mode 4 is set, and the pachinko gaming machine is ready to start a game (interrupt processing for determining whether or not a special symbol is appropriate). The means for selecting a game mode using the RAM clear / mode setting switch in this way is also referred to as "game mode selection means" or "determination probability selection means". Further, means for determining and setting the selected game mode is also referred to as “game mode setting means” or “determination probability setting means”.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on for the first time (after manufacturing), when the power is turned on for the first time after replacement of the main control board 80, or when there is an abnormality in the setting information of the setting storage unit 174, any setting information is stored. It is assumed that the game mode is not set, and the value indicating the game mode is not displayed. Further, the value [−−−−] is displayed on the information display section 88, and the game mode is set unless one of the game modes is selected by pressing the RAM clear / mode setting switch at least once. Not done.

[Main control main processing]
Next, a main control main process according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The following description focuses on differences from the main control main process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 12, and omits the description of common processes. In the main control main process of the fifth embodiment, after the processes of S108 and S109, it is determined whether or not the storage information (base information) of the base storage unit 175 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 has an abnormality. A base storage unit determination process is performed (S111), and the process proceeds to S110. The base storage unit determination process (S111) is executed only once after the power is turned on when the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter (after the game is started). Details of the base storage unit determination processing will be described later.

[Mode setting processing]
Next, a mode setting process (S106) according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The following description focuses on differences from the mode setting process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14, and a description of common processes is omitted. In the mode setting process of the fifth embodiment, if it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is ON (YES in S3101), and if it is determined in S3102 that the mode setting key is ON (YES in S3102), The setting information stored in the setting storage unit (the setting information stored and held in the storage holding unit) is read, and if there is the stored setting information, a value indicating the game mode corresponding to the setting information is displayed on the information display. Display in the section. Here, although not shown in FIG. 61, if the setting information (normal setting information) is not stored in the setting storage unit or if there is an abnormality in the stored setting information, any of the setting information is A value (symbol) indicating the state (no game mode is selected) is displayed as not stored ([----] described above).

  Next, following S3103 and S3104, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is operated (input) (S3105). When it is determined in S3105 that the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 has been input (YES in S3105), the setting information indicating the selected game mode is updated and stored (S3106), and the information display unit displays the updated information. The game mode is updated to a value indicating the game mode corresponding to the game mode and displayed (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3108. Here, although not shown in FIG. 61, in a state where no setting information is stored (a state where [−−−−] is displayed), the mode setting key is switched from ON to OFF, and the game mode is set. When the change state is ended, the pachinko gaming machine remains in the game disabled state and does not enter the game start state. That is, in order to change from a state in which no setting information is stored to a game start state (to set any game mode), in the game mode change state, at least one time of the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is set. Operation (input) must be performed.

  If it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is not ON (NO in S3101), a setting storage unit determination process described later is performed (S3132), and a game mode corresponding to the setting information in the setting storage unit is set. Then, the process proceeds to S3118. If it is determined in S3102 that the mode setting key is not ON (NO in S3102), a setting storage unit determination process described later is performed (S3134), and the process shifts to S3111.

[Setting storage unit determination process]
Next, the setting storage unit determination process (S3132) of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The setting storage unit determination process (S3132) is a process executed in the mode setting process (S106) of the fifth embodiment, and is executed when it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is not ON (NO in S3101). You. First, check data relating to the setting information stored in the setting storage unit of the main control unit is calculated (S3301), and it is determined whether the check data is normal (S3302). That is, in S3302, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the setting information of the setting storage unit stored and held by the storage unit. A unit that determines whether there is any abnormality in the setting information stored in the setting storage unit (also referred to as “setting probability storage unit”) when starting the power supply is also referred to as “first abnormality determining unit”. Further, a unit that determines whether or not the game information stored in the first game information storage unit has an abnormality when starting power supply is also referred to as a “second abnormality determination unit”. A unit that determines whether or not the game information stored in the second game information storage unit when starting power supply has an abnormality is also referred to as a “third abnormality determination unit”. A unit that determines whether there is any abnormality in the base information stored in the base storage unit when starting power supply is also referred to as a “fourth abnormality determination unit”.

  In S3302, the check data is normal, that is, there is no abnormality in the setting information (setting information stored and held by the storage holding unit) stored in the setting storage unit (any normal setting information is stored). When it is determined (YES in S3302), the process is terminated, and the process shifts to the process of S3133 of the mode setting process (S106). On the other hand, there is an abnormality in the check data (including a case where none of the setting information is stored), that is, information indicating a normal game mode (game modes 1 to 5) is not stored, or any setting information If it is determined that the game mode is not stored (NO in S3302), the storage area (setting information) of the setting storage unit is initialized (S3303), the game mode non-setting flag is turned on (S3304), and the game mode setting instruction is issued. A notification command is transmitted (S3305), and an infinite loop is entered. A message such as "Please set the game mode" is displayed on a predetermined display unit (for example, the display screen 7a or the display unit on the back of the game board) by transmitting the game mode setting instruction command (sub-control unit or the like). I do. Thereby, the game clerk or the like operates the RAM clear / mode setting switch or the like to recognize that the game mode setting means needs to set the game mode. In addition, by setting an infinite loop after S3305, the game cannot be started in the game mode not set state (the game cannot be started). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent a player or a game store from being inadvertently disadvantaged by setting an unintended game mode. In the setting storage unit determination processing in S3134, the same processing as the setting storage unit determination processing in S3132 is performed, and thus the description and illustration are omitted.

  Next, the base storage unit determination processing (S111) according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the base storage unit determination processing (S111), first, check data relating to the base value stored in the base storage unit of the main control unit is calculated (S3401), and it is determined whether the check data is normal (S3402). That is, in S3402, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the base information of the base storage unit stored and held by the storage unit. In S3402, it is determined that the check data is normal, that is, there is no abnormality in the base information (base information stored and held by the storage holding unit) stored in the base storage unit (normal base information is stored). If YES (YES in S3402), the base information stored in the base storage unit (base information stored and held by the storage holding unit), which is the base value at the time of the previous power failure, is displayed on the information display unit (S3403), Finish the process. On the other hand, it is determined that the check data is abnormal (including the case where no base information is stored), that is, that information indicating a normal base value is not stored, or that no base value is stored. If it has been performed (NO in S3402), then, the storage area (base information) of the base storage unit is initialized (S3403), a base storage unit abnormality notification command is transmitted (S3405), and the initial base value (specifically, “0”) )) Is displayed (S3406), and the process ends.

  By transmitting the base storage unit abnormality notification command (sub-control unit, etc.), a predetermined display unit (for example, the display screen 7a or the display unit on the back side of the game board) displays a message such as "There is an abnormality in the base value, please inspect". Display a message. Thereby, the game store clerk or the like sees the opportunity and recognizes that the inspection on the base display is necessary. It should be noted that the abnormality related to the base display does not directly affect the game, so that the game can be started. Alternatively, the game may be disabled, and the game may be disabled until the abnormality is resolved.

  Next, a power-off monitoring process (S209) according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The following description focuses on differences from the power-off monitoring process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 44, and a description of common processes is omitted. In the power-off monitoring process (S209) of the fifth embodiment, if it is determined that a power-off signal has been input (YES in S2651), then the data (state, game) currently stored in the first game information storage unit (S2652), and then stores the current data (state, game information) stored in the second game information storage unit in the save area of the RAM of the payout control unit. (S2653), and then the data (setting information) stored in the current setting storage unit is stored and held in the save area of the RAM of the main control unit (S2654), and then stored in the current base storage unit. The stored data (base information) is stored in the save area of the RAM of the main control unit (S2655), the power flag is turned on (S2656), and the process is terminated. This makes it possible to reliably store and hold the backup target data stored in the backup area when a power failure occurs.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the game information, the setting information, and the base information are stored in different storage areas, respectively, and the target of an arbitrary initialization process using the RAM clear / mode setting switch is the game information alone. I have. Then, even if the game information is initialized, if there is no abnormality in the stored setting information, the game mode is set to a value based on the setting information, so that the game mode setting operation can be performed again at initialization. It is unnecessary and the setting of gaming machines is more efficient. The same applies when the stored game information has an abnormality. The setting information and the base information are not subjected to any initialization processing using the RAM clear / mode setting switch, so that a fair gaming machine can be provided.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The circuit configuration of the sixth embodiment (mainly, the main control board 80, the payout control board 90, and the power supply board 109) is almost the same as the circuit configuration of the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 59). Description is omitted. The sixth embodiment is partially different from the first to fifth embodiments in that the setting of the game mode (determination probability) is changed in a predetermined portion (place) of the gaming machine, and the setting is changed. A confirmation display section 181, which can notify that the change has been made or that the game mode (determination probability) set in the game machine is being confirmed (the game machine is in the game mode confirmation state), and the like. 182 and 183 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the main control unit 80 provided on the back side of the gaming machine includes an information display unit 88 (second setting display unit) and a mode setting lock unit 89 necessary for changing the setting of the gaming mode and confirming the setting. Is provided. The power control unit 109 (power control board) also provided on the back side of the gaming machine is provided with a power switch 84 and a RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 necessary for changing the setting of the game mode and confirming the setting.

  As shown in FIG. 66, a second confirmation display section 182 (third setting display section) is provided on the front side (front side of the game machine) of the game board (game machine). When the gaming machine is in the gaming mode change state, a character display of “being set” is displayed on the second confirmation display unit 182 in order to notify a person in front of the gaming machine, such as a player or a game clerk, of the state. Note that any display mode may be used as long as the display mode indicates that the game mode has been changed. Although not shown, when the gaming machine is in the gaming mode confirmation state, the second confirmation display unit 182 displays “confirming” in order to notify a person in front of the gaming machine, such as a player or a game clerk, of the state. "May be displayed. Similarly, any display mode may be used as long as the display mode indicates the game mode confirmation state.

  Although the structure of the second confirmation display unit 182 will be described later, the second confirmation display unit 182 closes all the gaming machine frames (the front frame 51, the main body frame 52, and the outer frame 53) on the front of the game board. It is provided at a position that can be visually recognized during a game to be played. For this reason, it is not efficient to use the second confirmation display section 182 only in the “game mode change state” or the “game mode confirmation state”, that is, during the non-game (non-game state). During the game, the second confirmation display unit 182 is also used as a game effect display unit. For example, when a game effect (reach or the like) with a high jackpot reliability is being executed, characters such as “chance” are displayed. Thus, during a non-game, the state of the “game mode change state” or the “game mode confirmation state” is notified, and during the game, a game effect is displayed to notify the jackpot reliability (potential jackpot execution possibility). Depending on the state (during non-game, during game), it is possible to switch the display content and to surely inform a player or the like of necessary information.

  The front side of the gaming machine refers to a surface facing the player in a state where the gaming machine is installed in an island facility of a game arcade (hall) and a game is executed. That is, the side shown in FIG. 1 is called the gaming machine front side. In addition, the back side of the gaming machine refers to a surface on the side opposite to the front side of the gaming machine, on which the control board and the like are provided. That is, the side shown in FIG. 2 is referred to as the gaming machine back side. In addition, the setting change and the setting confirmation of the game mode are usually performed by opening the open / close frame (the main frame 52 and the front frame 51) with respect to the outer frame 53 fixed to the island facility (in the state shown in FIG. 67). Done. Specifically, the power supply switch 84, the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830, the mode setting lock unit 89, the setting key, and the like are accessed from the front of the gaming machine with the opening / closing frame opened from the front of the gaming machine. The predetermined operation mode is executed. However, there is a possibility that the setting of the game mode is changed while the game machine is closed by some method (for example, by setting the game machine set on the back side to the open state). Even in such a case, by confirming the display mode of the second confirmation display section 183, the player can easily and reliably know that the game mode is in the "game mode change state" or the "game mode confirmation state". It becomes possible. In addition to this, when the setting of the game mode is changed (or when resetting is performed), the player is notified that the setting has been changed (resetting has been performed). Is also good.

  As a result, it becomes difficult for the game store or the like to change the game mode without the permission of the player after the start of the game during business hours or the like, and it becomes possible for the game store and the player to have a fair gaming machine. . The display of the second confirmation display unit 182 may be controlled by the main control unit 80. Thereby, the display can be controlled by the main control unit 80 which controls the setting of the game mode, and the display of the second confirmation display unit 182 can be controlled more reliably, and the fraud such as shutting off the display can be prevented as much as possible. It becomes possible. Further, an abnormality determination unit is provided for determining whether the second confirmation display unit 182 has an abnormality (whether display control can be performed normally). If the second confirmation display unit 182 has an abnormality, the abnormality occurs. May be notified by a speaker or another display unit, or when there is an abnormality, the setting change of the game mode may be disabled. Of course, the display of the second confirmation display unit 182 may be controlled by the sub-control unit 90.

  As shown in FIG. 67, first confirmation display portions 181a and 181b (first setting display portions) are provided on the side surface of the gaming machine (the side surface of the gaming machine). Like the second confirmation display unit 182, the first confirmation display unit 181 indicates that the setting of the game mode (determination probability) has been changed, that the setting has been changed, or that the game mode has been set to the gaming machine. Display that the game mode (determination probability) is being checked (the gaming machine is in the game mode confirmation state), etc., and that the person in front of the gaming machine, such as a player or a game clerk, is in this state. To the player or the like. As described above, the change of the setting of the game mode is usually performed by opening the open / close frame (including the main frame 52 and the front frame 51) with respect to the outer frame 53 fixed to the island facility (see FIG. 67). State). In such an open state, the game board 2 and the like rotate to change the angle viewed from the player, and the player can see the second confirmation display unit 182 displayed toward the front (front) of the gaming machine or the effect symbol. It becomes difficult to see the display mode of the display unit 7b (it becomes difficult to visually recognize), and it is difficult to accurately grasp and recognize the display contents.

  One end of the opening / closing frame (the main body frame 52 and the front frame 51) is rotatably supported by the outer frame, and the first confirmation display portions 181a and 181b are opened at the other end not supported by the shaft. It is provided on the side surface. Thereby, the first confirmation display section 181 (181a, 181b) becomes easy to see when the gaming machine frame (open / close frame) is in the open state. With this, when the gaming machine frame (opening / closing frame) is in the closed state, the player or the like confirms that the setting of the game mode (determination probability) has been changed by the second confirmation display unit 182 or the effect symbol display unit. It is confirmed that the setting has been changed, or that the game mode (determination probability) set in the gaming machine is being confirmed, and the first confirmation display is displayed when the gaming machine frame (opening / closing frame) is open. That the setting of the game mode (determination probability) has been changed, that the setting has been changed, or that the game mode (determination probability) set in the gaming machine is being checked by the units 181a and 181b. Etc. can be confirmed. In addition, even when the gaming machine frame (opening / closing frame) is in the closed state or the open state, it is possible to reliably confirm and grasp the state of the gaming machine, such as setting change. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 67, a plurality of first confirmation display portions 181 are provided on a side portion (side surface) of an openable / closable gaming machine frame (open / close frame). Although the first confirmation display section 181a is visible from the front of the gaming machine even when the gaming machine frame (opening / closing frame) is in the closed state, it is difficult to grasp the display content from the front of the gaming machine (difficult to see). It is provided on the side surface of the front frame 51 which is a suitable position. That is, since the display symbol display section and the first confirmation display section 181a have different display angles (display directions), it is not possible to simultaneously grasp the display contents of the production symbol display section and the display contents of the first confirmation display section 181a. Difficult (visible).

  Further, the first confirmation display section 181b is provided on the back side of the main body frame 52 (including a member attached to the main body frame), which is in a position that is invisible when the gaming machine frame (open / close frame) is in a closed state. ing. When the gaming machine frame (opening / closing frame) is in a closed state, the side portion of the main body frame 52 provided with the first confirmation display portion 181b is covered on the back side of the gaming machine and is not exposed in front of the gaming machine. When the gaming machine frame (opening / closing frame) is rotated by a predetermined angle or more to be in a relatively large open state, the first confirmation display section 181b is exposed at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine. That is, when the gaming machine frame (opening / closing frame) is turned to the open state by rotating the gaming machine frame (opening / closing frame) from the front side of the gaming machine to such an extent that a game mode setting change operation (setting confirmation operation) is possible. The display contents of 181b are easily visible from the front side of the gaming machine.

  By providing the plurality of first confirmation display portions 181a and 181b at different positions on the sides of the gaming machine frame (opening / closing frame) in this manner, when the rotating angle of the gaming machine frame (opening / closing frame) is small, Regardless of whether the game mode is large or where the player is (standby), in any situation, the game mode (judgment probability) setting has been changed, the setting has been changed, Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably confirm that the game mode (determination probability) set in the gaming machine is being confirmed.

  Further, the display of the first confirmation display units 181a and 181b may be controlled by the main control unit 80, similarly to the second confirmation display unit 182. Thereby, the display can be controlled by the main control unit 80 which controls the setting of the game mode, and the first confirmation display unit 181 can be more reliably displayed and controlled to prevent improper operation such as cutting off the display as much as possible. It becomes possible. In addition, similarly to the second confirmation display unit 182, the first confirmation display unit 181 includes abnormality determination means for determining whether there is an abnormality (whether display control can be performed normally). In some cases, the occurrence of the abnormality may be notified by a speaker or another display unit, and if there is an abnormality, the setting change of the game mode may be disabled. Of course, the display of the first confirmation display unit 181 may be controlled by the sub-control unit 90.

  Further, regarding the display mode of the first confirmation display sections 181a and 181b, when the gaming machine is in the gaming mode change state, the first state is notified to a person in front of the gaming machine, such as a player or a game clerk, to notify the state. The characters “Setting” are displayed on the confirmation display units 181a and 181b. Note that any display mode may be used as long as the display mode indicates that the game mode has been changed. Also, although not shown, when the gaming machine is in the gaming mode confirmation state, the first confirmation display sections 181a and 181b display " Character display such as "under confirmation" may be performed. Similarly, any display mode may be used as long as the display mode indicates the game mode confirmation state.

  In addition, since the first confirmation display units 181a and 181b are provided at positions that are difficult or invisible from the front of the gaming machine, the "game mode change state" and the "game mode confirmation state" are displayed (display ON state). ), A non-display state (display OFF state) is established when the game is enabled. That is, the first confirmation display units 181a and 181b do not perform the game effect display during the game.

  As another mode of the display control of the first confirmation display units 181a and 181b, the display control (display state control timing) of the first confirmation display unit 181a and the first confirmation display unit 181b may be different. Specifically, the first confirmation display unit 181a is provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine even when the open / close frame is closed, and the first confirmation display unit 181b is visible from the front of the game machine when the open / close frame is closed. It is provided in an impossible position. Therefore, an opening / closing determination unit that determines whether the opening / closing frame is in the open state is provided. When it is determined that the opening / closing frame is in the closed state, even if the game mode is in the “game mode change state” or the “game mode confirmation state”, the first The confirmation display unit 181b may be in a non-display state (display OFF state), and the first confirmation display unit 181a may be in a display state (display ON state). As a result, wasteful display can be efficiently performed.

  For the same reason, in the game possible state, the first confirmation display unit 181a may be set to the display state (display ON state), and the first confirmation display unit 181b may be set to the non-display state (display OFF state). Thereby, the display of the first confirmation display unit 181a is controlled in a predetermined mode during the game, and the retroactive effect is low for the player playing the game machine, but other players around the game machine or It is possible to give a production effect to a game prospective person.

  Next, the configuration of the second confirmation display unit 182 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the second confirmation display unit 182 shown in FIG. The second confirmation display unit 182 has a housing space inside the front frame 191 and the rear frame 192 which are outer housings, and the front lens 193 and the first display are provided in the housing space from the front frame 191 side. The plate 194, the second display plate 195, the diffusion lens 196, and the LED board 197 are superimposed and stored in this order.

  As described above, the second confirmation display section 182 can switch and display “setting” and “chance” in accordance with the state of the gaming machine. The first display panel 194 on which the text “SETTING” is formed is formed in blue (first color), and the second display panel 195 on which the text “CHANCE” is formed is red (second color). Is formed. A plurality of LEDs 198 (LED elements) are mounted on the LED board 197, and the LEDs 198 can emit light in blue (first color) or red (second color). When the LED 198 is controlled to emit light in blue, the characters “being set” on the first display panel 194 formed in blue are difficult to see from the front of the second confirmation display unit 182 and are formed in red. The word “chance” on the second display panel 195 is easily visible from the front of the second confirmation display unit 182. Note that when the LED 198 does not emit light, it is determined that neither the character “being set” nor the character “chance” is visually recognized. As described above, by controlling the display of the LED board 197 of the second confirmation display unit 182, it is possible to display “Setting” or “Chance” according to the state of the gaming machine. Become.

  Next, another configuration of the second confirmation display unit of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view in which another second confirmation display unit 183 is disassembled. The second confirmation display unit 183 has a housing space inside the front frame 201 and the rear frame 202 which are outer housings, and the third display plate 205 and the diffusion plate are provided in the housing space from the front frame 202 side. The lens 206 and the second LED board 207 are housed in a superimposed order. The first LED board 203 is housed in the side of the housing space, on the side surfaces of the third display panel 205, the diffusion lens 206 and the second LED board 207, in a direction perpendicular to these. Further, the LED 204 is executed on the first LED board 203, and the LED 208 is executed on the second LED board 207. In addition, cuts are formed on the third display panel 205 so as to display (form) the character being set. When the first LED board 203, the third display panel 205, the diffusion lens 206, and the second LED board 207 are housed and assembled in the housing space, the LEDs 204 of the first LED board 203 are placed on the side of the third display board 205. Part.

  When the LED 204 on the first LED board 203 is turned off (not displayed) and the LED 208 on the second LED board 207 is displayed, the characters “being set” formed on the third display panel 205 are not visible or visible. Displayed in a difficult manner. That is, it is simply displayed by the light emission of the color emitted by the LED 208 of the second LED substrate 207. On the other hand, when the LED 204 of the first LED board 203 emits light, or when both the LED 204 of the first LED board 203 and the LED 208 of the second LED board 207 emit light, the light emitted by the LED 204 of the first LED board 203 is the third display. The light enters the third display panel 205 from the side of the plate 205, is reflected by the cut (cut portion), and the character of “being set” becomes easily visible. As described above, by controlling the display of the first LED board 203, it is possible to perform switching display control of display / non-display of the characters “being set” according to the state of the gaming machine.

[Other aspects]
In the embodiment described above, the mode setting switch 82 is constituted by a slide type dip switch. The mode setting switch is not limited to such an embodiment, and may be, for example, a rotary switch or a push-down or push-up binary switch. For example, when an arbitrary game mode is set, the information indicating the selected game mode (for example, [2]) is displayed on the information display unit 88 each time the binary switch is operated. It is assumed that the game mode selected from [2] → [3] → [4] changes for each operation.

  Further, in a gaming machine in which the setting of the game mode can be changed by such a game mode change switch such as a binary switch or a rotary switch, the initial value of the game mode in the game mode change state when the RAM is cleared is always set to a specific value. It may be set (set) to a game mode (for example, a game mode 3 which is a middle value of five stages). Note that the stored information indicating the game mode is deleted by the RAM clear processing. Then, in the game mode change state after the RAM is cleared, by operating the game mode change switch in one direction, the specific game mode (game mode 3) is sequentially changed to the game mode 2 and the game mode 1 to obtain a desired one. It is assumed that the game mode is selected. Further, in the game mode change state after the RAM is cleared, by operating the game mode change switch in the other direction, the specific game mode (game mode 3) is sequentially changed to the game mode 4 and the game mode 5, and the desired game mode is changed. It is assumed that the game mode is selected. Thereby, the operation mode of the setting change after clearing the RAM is common to all the gaming machines (for example, when setting the setting to 1, each gaming machine is operated twice in one direction). In addition, this also makes it possible to reduce a setting change operation error and the like when changing the setting of the game mode of a plurality of gaming machines. In addition, the specific game mode (initial game mode) may be a game mode in which the big hit probability has an intermediate value among the game modes provided in the gaming machine (corresponding to the game mode 2 in the present embodiment). As a result, as long as the RAM is cleared and the state is changed to the setting change state, the game mode can be set to a game mode in which the game store and the player are balanced. Further, when it is desired to set a plurality of gaming machines in such a balanced game mode, the setting can be performed without operating the game mode change switch. This also makes it possible to minimize the operations (operation procedures) involved in changing the setting of the game mode and simplify the setting operation.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the information display section 88 is provided, and the game information to be displayed is changed depending on the period (the period before entering the game-enabled state, the period of the game-enabled state). Specifically, information for specifying the game mode is displayed during the period before the game is enabled, and the base value is displayed during the period when the game is enabled. That is, the game mode display section and the base value display section are shared by one display section. Instead of this mode, a game mode display for displaying a game mode and a base display for displaying a base value may be separately provided. At this time, the information display section of the first embodiment is used as a base display (also referred to as a “game information display section”), and one or a plurality of 7-segment displays are separately provided on the main control board. As a game mode display (also referred to as a “game information display section”). In addition, even when separately provided, the period in which the information for specifying the selected (set) game mode is displayed on the game mode display is only the game mode change state before the game starts, or only the game mode confirmation state. And In addition, the base display may be always displayed before the game is enabled after the power is turned on, or may be constantly displayed after the game is enabled. At least, it is always displayed after the game is enabled.

  In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 83 is provided on the power supply board 109, but a RAM clear switch may be provided on the main control board 80 (may be mounted) instead. Thereby, members relating to the change of the game mode (members for satisfying the specific conditions) can be managed on the main control board 80 as much as possible, and the management can be facilitated and the prevention of fraud can be enhanced.

  In the above-described embodiment, five types of game modes that can be set are provided, and the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the big hit type winning probability are different depending on the game mode. Instead of this mode, only the low probability big hit probability may differ depending on the game mode. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize how much the game mode is set to obtain the profit, and the profit management of the gaming machine is facilitated.

  Further, in addition to the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine is provided with timer means capable of measuring time (or measuring time) (for example, a watchdog timer or a timer capable of measuring time since power-on). When the setting of the game mode is changed, the measured value of the timer means (for example, clock information such as "9:30") is stored in a predetermined storage area, and the stored measured value is checked later. It may be possible. The measurement value indicating the setting change time (time) stored in the storage area is to be backed up. Further, since this information can be used for fraud prevention and fraud detection, it may be excluded from erasure by RAM clear, like the base value. That is, even if the initialization is performed, the stored “measured value indicating the setting change time (time)” is not erased. Further, the information of the measured value may be output from a predetermined external terminal (external output terminal) to the outside of the gaming machine, and may be managed by a hall computer or the like connected to the external terminal.

  In a game arcade, a video camera (including a photographing unit, a photographing data recording unit, and the like) that images a gaming machine, and a display unit (reproduction display unit) that displays (reproduces) an image recorded by the video camera are provided. A gaming machine monitoring system may be provided. Further, the video camera (surveillance camera) is arranged so that when the setting of the game mode is changed, the changer is recorded so that the video of the entire game machine and its surroundings can be recorded. If it is suspected that the setting of the game mode is incorrect, or if a malfunction or an error is suspected, the stored “measurement value indicating the setting change time (time)” is read, and a predetermined measurement value is selected. Control may be performed so that the video camera video corresponding to the time (time) can be reproduced.

  As another embodiment of the above-described embodiment, the following embodiment can be mentioned. It is preferable that the mode setting switch 82 is locked (closed) by covering (enclosing) the mode setting switch 82 with a keyed case (clothing member) so that the mode setting switch 82 cannot be freely operated. Then, only when it is necessary to change the game mode (setting change), the lock is unlocked using the key and the mode setting switch 82 is operated so as to satisfy a predetermined change condition, so that the game mode can be changed. Good. This makes it possible to further reduce the possibility that the game mode is changed illegally. When the game machine (backup area) is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch 83, sound of a predetermined volume (high volume) is output from the speaker, or alternatively / additionally. By controlling the lighting of the panel lamp and the frame lamp, the fact that the initialization has been performed is noticeably noticed to the surroundings. Thereby, it is assumed that the game mode may be changed. In the first embodiment, the mode setting switch 82 is provided on the main control board 80 as shown in FIG. However, the location of the mode setting switch is not limited to such a mode. For example, the mode setting switch 82 may be provided on the payout control board 110. Further, the mode setting switch 82 may be provided on a board which is separate from the main control board 80 and which can communicate with the main control board 80 (can transmit selection information to the CPU of the main control section).

  In the mode setting monitoring process (S210) of the first embodiment, the setting state of the mode setting switch is constantly monitored while the power is being supplied (that is, during the game), and the game mode selected by the mode setting switch is: When a state different from the game mode set in the pachinko gaming machine is detected, the state is detected, and a predetermined display unit (display screen 7a or display unit on the back side of the gaming machine), a speaker, or a device outside the gaming machine is displayed. It is to be notified by output. While playing a game, the game mode cannot be changed by operating the mode setting switch.However, when the power is turned on again or the game mode is reset, an unexpected game mode is set. May occur. Therefore, when the mode setting switch is operated even during the game, such a situation can be prevented beforehand by performing an error notification.

  In another aspect, in addition to or instead of this, it is possible to detect whether the mode setting lock portion is in the ON position or the OFF position during a game, and when the mode setting lock portion is in the game possible state (starting the game) In this case, when the mode setting lock portion which has been in the OFF position at the time of the operation) is operated to the ON position, this is notified on a predetermined display portion to prevent an unexpected situation. Specifically, in the case where a game is started with the setting key inserted in the insertion portion of the mode setting lock portion (at the OFF position), a game clerk or a maintenance person contacts the back side of the gaming machine for some reason. Sometimes, the user accidentally (intentionally) touches the setting key and turns the key to the ON position. Also in such a case, since the game is being played, the setting of the game mode cannot be changed, but a problem may occur when the power is turned on again.

  For example, the power is turned off while the setting key is operated during the game and the mode setting lock is in the ON position. Then, when the game clerk turns on the power next time, since the mode setting lock portion is in the ON position, the game machine enters the game mode confirmation state and does not shift to the game start state. In such a state, the mode can be shifted to the game start state by changing the mode setting lock portion to the OFF position. Also, although the setting of the game mode is not changed, when the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned on to clear the RAM, the pachinko gaming machine is unintentionally turned on because the mode setting lock is in the ON position. It shifts to the game mode change state. In such a situation, the pachinko gaming machine cannot be smoothly shifted to the playable state, and the power of the game store staff or the like is troubled when the power is turned on. In addition, the setting of the game mode may be changed at an unintended timing by an unauthorized player, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage.

  In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, the position (ON or OFF) of the mode setting lock is constantly monitored during the game, and a predetermined display is displayed when the mode setting lock is operated to the ON position during the game. Unit (display screen 7a or display unit on the back side of the gaming machine), a speaker, or an output to the outside of the gaming machine.

[Others]
In the configuration of the above-described gaming machine, the "variable which can be changed to a starting port into which a game ball can enter, and a second mode having a higher possibility of entering a game ball than the first mode and the first mode". And an identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the start port or the variable start port. In addition, a "variable ball entry which can be changed between a ball entry state in which game balls can enter and a ball entry state in which game balls cannot enter, and a first hit / fail judgment based on entry into the starting port. First determining unit for executing the second determining unit based on a ball entering the variable start port, and determining whether the first or second determining unit is successful. Special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which the variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state. In addition, the first game state in which the frequency of entering game balls into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and the second game state in which the frequency of entering game balls into the variable starting port is higher than the first game state And a game state setting means for setting the above. Here, the “predetermined frequency” includes 0. In addition, `` a variable ball entrance that can be changed to a starting port where game balls can enter, a ball entry state where game balls can enter, and a ball entry impossible state where game balls cannot enter, Determining means for performing a determination based on a ball entering the starting port, and game control means for executing game control based on game information stored in the game information storage means when power supply is started from the power supply means And ".

  In the first embodiment, the number of times of opening the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening in one round is one. However, the number of times of opening the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening in one round is plural. The number of rounds may be different, or a round having a different number of times of opening may be provided. Further, in the first embodiment, the control processing of performing the second special figure reservation with priority over the first special figure reservation, that is, the control processing of so-called special figure 2 priority, is not limited thereto. The control process may be a control process of giving priority to the second special figure reservation, that is, a so-called control process of the special figure 1 priority. Also, priorities are not set for the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation, and the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation are digested in order from the oldest one. Control processing, that is, control processing of so-called ball order (memory order) digestion may be used.

  Further, in the first embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine having the specific area 39 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine of a type in which whether or not a high-probability state is provided after the end of a big hit game is determined only by the type of the big hit symbol stopped and displayed. Needless to say, "based on the fact that a special symbol is determined to be a big hit (the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol)", the gaming machine of this type is also used in the present embodiment. The pachinko gaming machines of Example 1 and other types of gaming machines are included. A pachinko gaming machine of a type not provided with a probability setting means (without a high probability state), having a specific area therein, a state in which game balls can enter and a state in which game balls enter. A large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible ball entry state is provided, and the winning port is set in a state where it can enter the ball for a predetermined time when the result of the hit judgment based on the ball entry into the starting port becomes a small hit. When a game ball enters a large winning opening in a ball-enabled state and the game ball passes through a specific area, the game becomes a big hit, a big hit game is executed, and the present invention is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko gaming machine is called a so-called one-type and two-type mixing machine. When the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, a high base state in which the frequency of game balls entering the starting port is increased can be given. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and generate a high base state that increases the frequency of entering the second starting port. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

(Reference Invention 1)
In the configuration of the gaming machine described above, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is:
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Game state information storage means capable of storing game state information, including at least information indicating a judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
Based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage, storage state storage means capable of storing the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply unit starts supplying power, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, a game state information restoring unit that restores the game state information when detecting a drop in power supply voltage,
When the power supply means starts supplying power, erases the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, and game state information initialization means that does not restore the game state information when detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, ,
The determination probability setting means,
When starting the game without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, it is possible to change the determination probability of the determination means,
When a game is started by restoring game state information by the game state information restoring means, the judgment probability of the judging means may not be changed.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-2 has a selection information determination process of determining selection information of the determination probability selection unit when the power supply unit starts supplying power in the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-1. ,
The determination probability setting means,
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initializing means, a determination probability corresponding to the selection information determined based on the selection information determination processing is determined as the determination probability of the determination means. It may be set.

(Reference Invention 2)
In the configuration of the above-described gaming machine, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is:
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined change condition, a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Game state information storage means capable of storing game state information, including at least information indicating a judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
In a period during which power is supplied by the power supply unit, a selection information monitoring unit that monitors selection information of the determination probability selection unit,
Even though the change condition is not satisfied, the selection information monitoring unit does not match the information indicating the determination probability stored in the game state information storage unit with the selection information of the determination probability selection unit. If it is determined that a predetermined error process is to be executed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1.
When the error processing is executed, the selection information monitoring unit determines that the information indicating the determination probability stored in the game state information storage unit and the selection information of the determination probability selection unit match. The error processing may be terminated based on

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-1 or 2-2.
The change condition may be satisfied at least when the power supply unit starts power supply.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-3,
Based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage, storage state storage means capable of storing the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply unit starts supplying power, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, a game state information restoring unit that restores the game state information when detecting a drop in power supply voltage,
When the power supply means starts supplying power, erases the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, and game state information initialization means that does not restore the game state information when detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, ,
The change condition may be satisfied at least when the game is started by the game state information initializing means without restoring the game state information.

(Reference Invention 3)
In the configuration of the above-described gaming machine, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3 is:
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Game state information storage means capable of storing game state information, including at least information indicating a judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
Based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage, storage state storage means capable of storing the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply unit starts supplying power, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, a game state information restoring unit that restores the game state information when detecting a drop in power supply voltage, With
When the power supply unit starts power supply, the selection power determination unit has a selection information determination process for determining selection information of the determination probability selection unit,
In the case of starting the game by restoring the game state information by the game state information restoring means, information indicating a judgment probability specified based on the restored game state information, and selection information of the judgment probability selection means, If it is determined that they do not match, a predetermined error process may be executed.

  Thus, when the determination probability is to be changed while the game state information is being recovered by the game state information recovery means, a predetermined error process is performed. In addition, it is possible to notify that an act of changing the determination probability has occurred while recovering the game state information, or to prevent the act from occurring.

In the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-2, when the gaming state information is restored by the gaming state information restoring unit to start a game in the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-1 based on the restored gaming state information. When it is determined that the information indicating the specified determination probability matches the selection information of the determination probability selection unit, the game can be executed without executing the error processing.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the case of starting the game by restoring the game state information, the judgment probability specified based on the restored game state information and the judgment probability corresponding to the selection information of the judgment probability selection means. Is determined, and when it is determined that they match, the game can be executed in a normal state without performing error processing. Thus, when starting the game, the game is started after confirming the selection information of the determination probability selection means. This also makes it possible to provide a fair game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2,
The error processing may include a game control stop processing for stopping at least a part of the game control. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being executed without the judgment probability corresponding to the selection information of the judgment probability selection means and the judgment probability specified based on the restored game state information being in agreement. .

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-3.
The error process includes a notification process of notifying that information indicating a determination probability specified based on the restored game state information and selection information of the determination probability selection unit do not match.

(Reference Invention 4)
In the case of a gaming machine equipped with the probability setting function as described above, the gaming machine determines which setting to use, so the player expects the gaming machine to have a high setting (a setting with a high jackpot probability). Select a machine. In addition, the amusement store side installs many high setting gaming machines that can easily give a lot of profits to the players in order to call a lot of players, and gives a lot of profits to the players to get a lot of profits A large number of gaming machines with a low setting (setting with a low jackpot probability) that are difficult to perform are installed, and an appropriate number of gaming machines with a high setting are installed in order to balance them. Therefore, setting of the jackpot probability and its management are very important.

  On the other hand, when the profit amount given to the player is far from expected, the setting of the gaming machine may be confirmed. In addition, when the cause is that the setting of the gaming machine is unintended, the probability setter at the game store side has simply set by mistake (to a probability different from the schedule), or It is necessary to confirm whether the wrongdoer has set the probability fraudulently. However, since it is not known when the setting of the jackpot probability has been changed, a large amount of labor is required to check the security camera and the like. In addition, when such misconduct is performed, disadvantages are given to both the game shop and the player, the number of game players is reduced, and the operating rate of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and in a gaming machine equipped with a setting function of a determination probability, it is possible to store a timing of setting change of a determination probability to prevent fraud, and to provide a fair gaming machine. To provide.

Reference Invention 4-1 The gaming machine of the invention is:
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
Timer means for counting at a fixed cycle (time measuring means for counting time);
Timer storage means for storing the count value of the timer means,
By performing a predetermined input operation along with the start of power supply in the power supply means, it is possible to change the determination probability of the determination means,
The timer storage means stores a count value when the determination probability of the determination means is changed.

  According to such a gaming machine, judgment probability storage means for storing a plurality of judgment probabilities as judgment probabilities of the judgment means, and judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation And determination probability setting means that can set the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. A timer means for counting at a fixed period; and a timer storage means for storing a predetermined count value of the timer means, wherein the timer storage means is provided when the setting of the determination probability is changed. Shall be stored. Thus, when the setting of the determination probability is changed, the count value at that time is stored, and it is possible to later confirm the time when the setting of the determination probability is changed. This also makes it possible to confirm whether the change timing of the determination probability is appropriate, whether the changer is appropriate, and the like.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-1.
An external output terminal capable of outputting the count value stored in the timer storage means to the outside of the gaming machine is provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, the count value indicating the time when the determination probability stored in the timer storage means has been changed can be output to the outside of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to easily manage the setting change timing of the determination probability of each gaming machine using a hall computer or the like connected to the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or Reference Invention 4-2,
Game state information storage means capable of storing game state information, including at least information indicating a judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
Based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage, storage state storage means capable of storing the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply unit starts supplying power, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, a game state information restoring unit that restores the game state information when detecting a drop in power supply voltage,
When the power supply means starts supplying power, erases the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, and game state information initialization means that does not restore the game state information when detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, ,
The determination probability setting means,
When starting the game without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, it is possible to change the determination probability of the determination means,
In the case where the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring unit and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination unit is made unchangeable.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state information including the information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means (also referred to as “setting information”) can be stored and held even after the power supply is stopped. It shall be prepared. When the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit is erased, and the game is selected by the determination probability selecting unit on condition that the game is started without restoring the game state information. It is possible to change to the judgment probability (setting change by the judgment probability setting means). That is, when starting the game by restoring the game state information based on the game state information stored and held by the storage and holding means, it is impossible to change to the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means.

  As a result, in order to change the current setting of the judgment probability to another judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the game state, and the game starts when the setting of the judgment probability is changed. The game state at the time can be set to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide fair games.

In addition, the gaming machine monitoring system of Reference Invention 4-4,
The gaming machine according to any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-3,
A shooting unit for shooting the gaming machine, and a recording device having a storage unit for storing an image shot by the shooting unit;
It is characterized by having.

  According to such a gaming machine monitoring system, the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3 described above, a shooting unit that shoots the gaming machine, and a storage unit that stores an image shot by the shooting unit. And a recording device having the same. By this, it is possible to easily confirm the setting change timing and the setting change person of the determination probability of the gaming machine by watching the image of the recording device at the time corresponding to the count value stored in the timer storage means. It becomes.

(Reference Invention 5)
In the case of a gaming machine equipped with the probability setting function as described above, the gaming machine determines which setting to use, so the player expects the gaming machine to have a high setting (a setting with a high jackpot probability). Select a machine. In addition, the amusement store side installs many high setting gaming machines that can easily give a lot of profits to the players in order to call a lot of players, and gives a lot of profits to the players to get a lot of profits A large number of gaming machines with a low setting (setting with a low jackpot probability) that are difficult to perform are installed, and an appropriate number of gaming machines with a high setting are installed in order to balance them. Therefore, setting of the jackpot probability and its management are very important. Therefore, when setting the jackpot probability, it is preferable to provide a display unit for displaying information indicating the set jackpot probability for a predetermined period in order to grasp which jackpot probability has been set.

  In addition, since the provision ratio of the game profit based on the number of prize balls and out balls is very important and useful game information in providing a fair gaming machine, a display unit for displaying information indicating the provision ratio is provided. It is preferable to provide them. However, as described above, providing a large number of display units such as a display unit that displays information indicating a jackpot probability and a display unit that displays information indicating an application ratio of a game profit is, due to the installation space of game parts, It is difficult, and the cost may become an issue.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a fair gaming machine by efficiently displaying a large number of game information by controlling the display timing.

Reference Invention 5-1 The gaming machine of the invention is:
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
A game profit providing means for providing a predetermined amount of game profit based on establishment of a specific condition;
A game information display unit capable of displaying predetermined game information,
With
The game information display unit displays information indicating a determination probability set by the determination probability setting means during a first period, and displays information indicating an award ratio of game profit in a specific period during a second period. Is what you do.

  According to such a gaming machine, judgment probability storage means for storing a plurality of judgment probabilities as judgment probabilities of the judgment means, and judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation And determination probability setting means that can set the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. The game device further includes: a game profit providing unit that provides a game profit when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a ball entering the entrance or a specific symbol is stopped), and a game information display unit that displays predetermined game information. The game information display unit displays information indicating the set determination probability during the first period, and displays information indicating the award ratio of the game profit in the specific period during the second period. Thereby, the game information (setting probability information or game profit giving ratio information) displayed on the game information display section is made different depending on the timing (the first period or the second period), and the display section can be shared, It is possible to properly grasp game information.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
The first period is a period before the start of the game, and the second period is a period after the start of the game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first period in which the information indicating the set determination probability is displayed is a period before the start of the game, and the second period in which the information indicating the award ratio of the game profit is displayed is the period after the start of the game. Period. That is, the determination probability set by a predetermined input operation before the start of the game is displayed before the game is started, and after the game is started by firing a game ball, for example, the determination probability is not set information. In addition, it is assumed that the game profit is given in proportion to the start of the game. As a result, appropriate information can be displayed at an appropriate time, the display unit can be shared, and the game information can be reliably grasped.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2,
An entrance where game balls can enter,
First counting means capable of counting the number of game balls fired in the game area,
Second counting means capable of counting the number of game balls provided by the game profit providing means,
The specific condition is established based on that a game ball enters the entrance,
The information indicating the award rate of the game profit displayed on the game information display unit after the start of the game is information calculated based on the count values of the first counting means and the second counting means. Is what you do.

  According to such a gaming machine, the entrance for satisfying the specific condition, the first counting means capable of counting the number of shot balls to the game area, and the second counting means capable of counting the number of provided game balls And Then, the information indicating the award ratio of the game profit is information calculated based on the count values of the first counting means and the second coefficient means. Thereby, the provision ratio of the game profit displayed in the second period after the start of the game is calculated based on the number of fired balls and the provided number of game balls. There is no (no change) game information. Also, in the first period before the start of the game, even if the information indicating the provision ratio of the game profit is not displayed and the information indicating the determination probability is displayed, the game information is reliably grasped without any trouble. It is possible.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-3.
The game information display unit displays information indicating the determination probability in the first period when the determination probability setting unit changes and sets the determination probability of the determination unit. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the determination probability of the determination means is changed and set, information indicating the determination probability is displayed in the first period. Thereby, when a predetermined input operation is performed and the setting of the determination probability is changed, information indicating the determination probability is reliably displayed in the first period, so that the game information can be properly and reliably grasped. It becomes possible. The game information display unit may not display the information indicating the determination probability in the first period when the setting of the determination probability is not changed.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4.
Game state information storage means capable of storing game state information, including at least information indicating a judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
Based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage, storage state storage means capable of storing the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply unit starts supplying power, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, a game state information restoring unit that restores the game state information when detecting a drop in power supply voltage,
When the power supply means starts supplying power, erases the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, and game state information initialization means that does not restore the game state information when detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, ,
With
The determination probability setting means,
When starting the game without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, it is possible to change the determination probability of the determination means,
When the game is started by restoring the game state information by the game state information restoring means, the judgment probability of the judging means cannot be changed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state information including the information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means (also referred to as “setting information”) can be stored and held even after the power supply is stopped. It shall be prepared. When the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit is erased, and the game is selected by the determination probability selecting unit on condition that the game is started without restoring the game state information. It is possible to change to the judgment probability (setting change by the judgment probability setting means). That is, when starting the game by restoring the game state information based on the game state information stored and held by the storage and holding means, it is impossible to change to the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means.

  As a result, in order to change the current setting of the judgment probability to another judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the game state, and the game starts when the setting of the judgment probability is changed. The game state at the time can be set to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide fair games.

(Reference Invention 6)
In the case of a gaming machine equipped with the probability setting function as described above, the gaming machine determines which setting to use, so the player expects the gaming machine to have a high setting (a setting with a high jackpot probability). Select a machine. Also, the amusement store side installs many high setting gaming machines to call many gamers, installs many low setting gaming machines to get more profits, and to balance them Or install the appropriate number of high-value gaming machines. However, since this is entirely determined by the gaming store, no gaming machine with a high setting is installed (all low setting), and there is a possibility that the player side will be significantly disadvantaged over the gaming store side. In addition, this may cause the player to distrust the game store side, which may lead to a decrease in the number of players and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and in a gaming machine having a function of setting a determination probability, a function of randomly setting the determination probability is provided, thereby diversifying a setting mode of the determination probability. It is intended to provide a gaming machine with a high gaming interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is:
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Game state information storage means capable of storing game state information, at least including information indicating a judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
A gaming machine in which the determination unit makes a determination based on the determination probability stored in the game state information storage unit,
The determination probability selection means includes random selection means capable of randomly selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities.

  According to such a gaming machine, a plurality of determination probabilities are stored as a determination probability of the determination means, a storage probability storage means, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, A determination probability setting unit that can set the selected determination probability as a determination probability of the determination unit, and a game state information storage unit that can store game state information including information indicating the set determination probability are provided. Further, as the determination probability selection means, a random selection means capable of randomly selecting a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities is provided. Accordingly, when the determination probability is selected (set) by the random selection means, the determination probability is randomly selected from the plurality of determination probabilities, and the determination probability is set. In addition, this makes it impossible for the probability setter to intentionally set a specific determination probability, and makes it possible to set a balanced determination probability.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1.
The determination probability selection means includes a specific probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined specific determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities.

  According to such a gaming machine, as the determination probability selection means, in addition to the random selection means, a specific probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined specific determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities is provided. Accordingly, when the determination probability is selected (set) by the specific probability setting means, a specific determination probability (for example, an intermediate determination probability among a plurality of determination probabilities) is selected from a plurality of determination probabilities, The determination probability is set. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent a gaming machine having a setting value not intended by the probability setter from being set.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-2.
According to the mode of the input operation of the judgment probability selection means, it is possible to select whether the selection probability is selected by the random selection means or the judgment probability by the specific probability selection means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the probability setter sets the determination probability at random according to the input operation mode (the first input operation mode, the second input operation mode, or the like) of the determination probability selection means, or performs a specific determination. It is possible to select whether to set the probability. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the setting manner of the determination probability in the game store.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-2 or 6-3.
A notification unit is provided for notifying which of the random selection means and the specific probability selection means has selected the determination probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is provided with a notifying unit for notifying whether the determination probability is determined by the random selection unit or the specific probability selection unit. Thus, by confirming the notification mode of the notification unit, it is possible to confirm which of the determination probability selection means has selected (set) the determination probability selection (setting).

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-4.
The notification unit is configured to provide notification in a manner recognizable by a player.

  According to such a gaming machine, the notification mode of the notification unit can be recognized by the player. This enables the player to recognize which of the determination probability selection means has selected (set) the selection (setting) of the determination probability, and which of the gaming machines should be used to play the game and when selecting the gaming machine. It will be possible to refer to it. This also makes it possible to prevent playing a game with an unintended game machine as much as possible.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-4 or Reference Invention 6-5,
The notifying unit notifies the game store clerk in a recognizable manner.

  According to such a gaming machine, a game clerk (probability setter) can recognize the notification mode of the notification unit. This allows the game clerk (probability setter) to recognize which of the determination probability selection means has selected (set) the determination probability selection (setting). In addition, this makes it possible to confirm whether or not the judgment probability is selected (set) by the unintended judgment probability selection means, and minimizes the selection (setting) of the judgment probability by the unintended judgment probability selection means. It can be prevented.

(Reference Invention 7)
Reference Invention 7-1 The gaming machine of the invention is:
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Game state information storage means capable of storing game state information, including at least information indicating a judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
Based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage, storage state storage means capable of storing the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply unit starts supplying power, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, a game state information restoring unit that restores the game state information when detecting a drop in power supply voltage,
When the power supply means starts supplying power, erases the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, and game state information initialization means that does not restore the game state information when detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, ,
A gaming machine in which the determination unit makes a determination based on the determination probability stored in the game state information storage unit,
As the determination probability selection means, having a random selection means capable of randomly selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities,
The determination probability setting means,
When starting the game without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, it is possible to change the determination probability of the determination means,
In the case where the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring unit and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination unit is made unchangeable.

  According to such a gaming machine, a plurality of determination probabilities are stored as a determination probability of the determination means, a storage probability storage means, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, A determination probability setting unit that can set the selected determination probability as a determination probability of the determination unit, and a game state information storage unit that can store game state information including information indicating the set determination probability are provided. Further, as the determination probability selection means, a random selection means capable of randomly selecting a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities is provided. Accordingly, when the determination probability is selected (set) by the random selection means, the determination probability is randomly selected from the plurality of determination probabilities, and the determination probability is set. In addition, this makes it impossible for the probability setter to intentionally set a specific determination probability, and makes it possible to set a balanced determination probability.

  In addition, the game device includes storage means for holding the game state information even after the power supply is stopped. When the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means is deleted, and the game state information is deleted. Can be changed to the judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selecting means (setting change by the judgment probability setting means) on condition that the game is started without restoring. That is, when starting the game by restoring the game state information based on the game state information stored and held by the storage and holding means, it is impossible to change to the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means. As a result, in order to change the current setting of the judgment probability to another judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the game state, and the game starts when the setting of the judgment probability is changed. The game state at the time can be set to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide fair games.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-1,
The determination probability selection means includes a specific probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined specific determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities.

  According to such a gaming machine, as the determination probability selection means, in addition to the random selection means, a specific probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined specific determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities is provided. Accordingly, when the determination probability is selected (set) by the specific probability setting means, a specific determination probability (for example, an intermediate determination probability among a plurality of determination probabilities) is selected from a plurality of determination probabilities, The determination probability is set. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent a gaming machine having a setting value not intended by the probability setter from being set.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-2,
According to the mode of the input operation of the judgment probability selection means, it is possible to select whether the selection probability is selected by the random selection means or the judgment probability by the specific probability selection means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the probability setter sets the determination probability at random according to the input operation mode (the first input operation mode, the second input operation mode, or the like) of the determination probability selection means, or performs a specific determination. It is possible to select whether to set the probability. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the setting manner of the determination probability in the game store.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-2 or 7-3.
A notification unit is provided for notifying which of the random selection means and the specific probability selection means has selected the determination probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is provided with a notifying unit for notifying whether the determination probability is determined by the random selection unit or the specific probability selection unit. Thus, by confirming the notification mode of the notification unit, it is possible to confirm which of the determination probability selection means has selected (set) the determination probability selection (setting).

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-5 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-4,
The notification unit is configured to provide notification in a manner recognizable by a player.

  According to such a gaming machine, the notification mode of the notification unit can be recognized by the player. This enables the player to recognize which of the determination probability selection means has selected (set) the selection (setting) of the determination probability, and which of the gaming machines should be used to play the game and when selecting the gaming machine. It will be possible to refer to it. This also makes it possible to prevent playing a game with an unintended game machine as much as possible.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-6 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-4 or Reference Invention 7-5,
The notifying unit notifies the game store clerk in a recognizable manner.

  According to such a gaming machine, a game clerk (probability setter) can recognize the notification mode of the notification unit. This allows the game clerk (probability setter) to recognize which of the determination probability selection means has selected (set) the determination probability selection (setting). In addition, this makes it possible to confirm whether or not the judgment probability is selected (set) by the unintended judgment probability selection means, and minimizes the selection (setting) of the judgment probability by the unintended judgment probability selection means. It can be prevented.

(Reference Invention 8)
In addition, a conventional gaming machine has a function of maintaining a game state when power supply is cut off and returning the game state based on the stored memory when power is supplied again, a so-called backup function. Some had. When a gaming machine having a backup function as described above is equipped with a probability setting function, it is possible to change the setting while maintaining the gaming state, and depending on how these functions are used, it is easy to generate a big hit or This may cause fraud or make it impossible to provide a fair gaming machine.

  Also, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with a probability setting function, in order to determine which setting is to be set by the gaming store, the player expects the gaming machine to have a high setting (a setting with a high jackpot probability) and sets the gaming machine in select. Also, the amusement store side installs many high setting gaming machines to call a large number of gamers, installs many low setting gaming machines to obtain a lot of profits, and to balance them Or install the appropriate number of high-profile gaming machines. However, since this is entirely determined by the gaming store, no gaming machine with a high setting is installed (all low setting), and there is a possibility that the player side will be significantly disadvantaged over the gaming store side. In addition, this may cause the player to distrust the game store side, which may lead to a decrease in the number of players and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and in a gaming machine equipped with a determination probability setting function, a predetermined restriction is set on a setting condition of the determination probability setting function, and the determination probability is determined. When a setting is changed, a fair game machine is provided by having a function of notifying the change.

Reference Invention 8-1 The gaming machine of the invention is:
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Game state information storage means capable of storing game state information, including at least information indicating a judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
Based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage, storage state storage means capable of storing the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply unit starts supplying power, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, a game state information restoring unit that restores the game state information when detecting a drop in power supply voltage,
When the power supply means starts supplying power, erases the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, and game state information initialization means that does not restore the game state information when detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, ,
The determination probability setting means,
When starting the game without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, it is possible to change the determination probability of the determination means,
When the game is started by restoring the game state information by the game state information restoring means, the judgment probability of the judging means cannot be changed,
In the case where the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initializing means,
The notification mode of the predetermined notification unit (liquid crystal, back lamp) differs between when the determination probability of the determination unit is changed by performing a predetermined input operation and when the determination probability of the determination unit is not changed. It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a gaming machine, by performing a predetermined input operation, it is possible to select and set the determination probability of the determination means from a plurality of determination probabilities to a predetermined determination probability. Further, the game device includes a storage holding unit capable of holding the game state information including information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting unit (also referred to as “setting information”) even after the power supply is stopped. When the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit is erased, and the game is selected by the determination probability selecting unit on condition that the game is started without restoring the game state information. It is possible to change to the judgment probability (setting change by the judgment probability setting means). That is, when starting the game by restoring the game state information based on the game state information stored and held by the storage and holding means, it is impossible to change to the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means. In addition, even when the game state information stored and retained by the memory holding unit is deleted and the game is started without restoring the game state information, there are times when the determination probability is changed and times when the determination probability is not changed, The notification mode of the notification unit differs between when the determination probability is changed and when it is not changed.

  As a result, in order to change the current setting of the judgment probability to another judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the game state, and the game starts when the setting of the judgment probability is changed. The game state at the time can be set to the initial state. Also, whether or not the determination probability has been changed can be confirmed by the notification mode of the notification unit. This makes it possible to provide fair games.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-1,
The notifying unit notifies the player whether the determination probability of the determination unit has been changed or the determination probability of the determination unit has not been changed, in a notification manner recognizable by the player.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can recognize whether or not the determination probability has been changed according to the notification mode of the notification unit. Thus, the player can recognize whether the selection (setting) of the determination probability has been changed, and can refer to which gaming machine to play a game or to select a gaming machine. This also makes it possible to prevent playing a game with an unintended game machine as much as possible.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-1 or 8-2.
The notifying unit notifies the gaming store clerk of a notification mode in which the determination probability of the determination unit is changed or the determination probability of the determination unit is not changed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game clerk (probability setter) can recognize whether or not the determination probability has been changed according to the notification mode of the notification unit. This allows the game clerk (probability setter) to recognize whether or not the determination probability has been changed with the initialization of the game state information. This makes it possible to minimize the occurrence of a situation in which the determination probability is unintentionally changed or the determination probability is not changed unintentionally.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-2 or Reference Invention 8-3,
An identification information display unit that variably displays the identification information based on the determination result of the determination unit, and when the result of the determination is a specific result, displays the identification information in a specific manner and stops.
The notification unit may be configured to continue the notification mode at least during a period from a predetermined time after the power supply by the power supply unit is started to a time when the identification information is changed and displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the notification mode includes identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information, and a notification mode capable of recognizing whether the determination probability by the notification unit has been changed is determined from a predetermined time after the start of power supply. It is assumed that the period of time until the change display of the identification information is executed, that is, from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on to when the game is started is continued. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the setting of the determination probability has been changed before starting the game. This also makes it possible to refer to which gaming machine to play a game in when selecting a gaming machine.

(Reference Invention 9)
The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 9-1 is:
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Game state information storage means capable of storing game state information, including at least information indicating a judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
Based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage, storage state storage means capable of storing the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply unit starts supplying power, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, a game state information restoring unit that restores the game state information when detecting a drop in power supply voltage,
When the power supply means starts supplying power, erases the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, and game state information initialization means that does not restore the game state information when detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, ,
The determination probability setting means,
When starting the game without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, it is possible to change the determination probability of the determination means,
When the game is started by restoring the game state information by the game state information restoring means, the judgment probability of the judging means cannot be changed,
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initializing means, when a predetermined input operation is performed to change the determination probability of the determination means,
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, and when the determination probability of the determination means is not changed,
When the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring means and the game is started,
In this case, the notification mode of a predetermined notification unit (liquid crystal, back lamp) is changed.

  According to such a gaming machine, by performing a predetermined input operation, it is possible to select and set the determination probability of the determination means from a plurality of determination probabilities to a predetermined determination probability. Further, the game device includes a storage holding unit capable of holding the game state information including information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting unit (also referred to as “setting information”) even after the power supply is stopped. When the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit is erased, and the game is selected by the determination probability selecting unit on condition that the game is started without restoring the game state information. It is possible to change to the judgment probability (setting change by the judgment probability setting means). That is, when starting the game by restoring the game state information based on the game state information stored and held by the storage and holding means, it is impossible to change to the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means.

  In addition, the notification mode of the notification unit differs between when the game is started by restoring the game state information and when the game is started without restoring the game state information. Furthermore, even when the game state information stored and retained by the memory holding means is deleted and the game is started without restoring the game state information, there are times when the determination probability is changed and times when the determination probability is not changed, The notification mode of the notification unit differs between when the determination probability is changed and when it is not changed.

  As a result, in order to change the current setting of the judgment probability to another judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the game state, and the game starts when the setting of the judgment probability is changed. The game state at the time can be set to the initial state. In addition, whether or not the determination probability has been changed and whether or not the game state information has been restored can be confirmed by the notification mode of the notification unit. This makes it possible to provide fair games.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 9-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 9-1,
The notifying unit may change the determination probability of the determination unit, do not change the determination probability of the determination unit, or recover the game state information, in a notification mode that the player can recognize. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can recognize whether the determination probability has been changed according to the notification mode of the notification unit and whether the game state information has been restored. As a result, the player can recognize whether the selection (setting) of the determination probability has been changed and whether the game state information has been restored, and which of the gaming machines should be used for playing the game and selecting the gaming machine It will be possible to refer to it. This also makes it possible to prevent playing a game with an unintended game machine as much as possible.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 9-1 or 9-2.
The notifying means, whether the judgment probability of the judgment means has been changed, whether the judgment probability of the judgment means has not been changed, or whether the game state information has been restored, is notified in a notification mode that a game clerk can recognize. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game clerk (probability setter) can recognize whether the determination probability has been changed according to the notification mode of the notification unit and whether the game state information has been restored. Thereby, the game clerk (probability setter) can recognize whether or not the game state information has been restored, and whether or not the determination probability has been changed with the initialization of the game state information. This makes it possible to minimize the occurrence of a situation in which the determination probability is unintentionally changed or the determination probability is not changed unintentionally.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 9-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 9-2 or 9-3.
An identification information display unit that variably displays the identification information based on the determination result of the determination unit, and when the result of the determination is a specific result, displays the identification information in a specific manner and stops.
The notification unit may be configured to continue the notification mode at least during a period from a predetermined time after the power supply by the power supply unit is started to a time when the identification information is changed and displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, a notification mode capable of recognizing whether or not the determination probability by the notification unit has been changed and whether or not the game state information has been restored is provided with identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information, The period from a predetermined time after the start of the power supply to the time when the identification information is changed, that is, from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on to when the game is started, is continued. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the setting of the determination probability has been changed and whether or not the game state information has been restored before the start of the game. This also makes it possible to refer to which gaming machine to play a game in when selecting a gaming machine.

(Reference Invention 10)
When the profit amount given to the player is far from expected, the setting of the gaming machine may be confirmed. In addition, in the case where the cause is that the setting of the gaming machine is unintended, the probability setter at the gaming store simply mistakenly sets the probability (to a probability different from the schedule), or It is necessary to check whether the wrongdoer has set the probability fraudulently. However, since it is not known when the setting of the jackpot probability has been changed, a great deal of labor is required to check the security camera or the like. In addition, when such misconduct is performed, disadvantages are given to both the game store and the player, the number of players is reduced, and the operating rate of the gaming machine may be reduced. Also, there is a movable object that operates to indicate the possibility of executing a big hit game or that operates in accordance with a change display of a symbol, and the movable object is reliably located at a specific position of the gaming machine. For this reason, some machines perform an initial operation when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a fair gaming machine in which a change in the setting of the determination probability is clarified in a gaming machine having a function of setting the determination probability.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 is:
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
When the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific result, the special information execution means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner, and executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
A first movable unit operable in a predetermined operation mode,
First movable control means for controlling the operation of the first movable portion,
The first movable control means performs an initial operation of the first movable part with the power supply means starting power supply,
When a predetermined determination probability is set by the determination probability setting means, a setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability has been set is to be executed,
After the power supply unit starts power supply, the setting notification is performed, and thereafter, an initial operation of the first movable unit is performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, judgment probability storage means for storing a plurality of judgment probabilities as judgment probabilities of the judgment means, and judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation And determination probability setting means that can set the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. A first movable portion that performs an initial operation in a predetermined operation mode in response to the start of power supply, and, when a predetermined determination probability is set, executes a setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability has been set; Shall be. Then, after the start of the power supply, the setting notification is performed, and then the initial operation of the first movable unit is performed.

  This makes it possible to execute the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable unit, which are executed in response to the start of the power supply, in the order of the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable unit. This also prevents the visibility of the setting notification indicating that the setting has been changed from being hindered by the initial operation of the first movable unit, ensures the visibility of the setting notification, and indicates that the setting has been changed. Can be reliably notified.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1,
Along with the variation display of the identification information, comprises an effect display unit capable of displaying a predetermined game effect,
The setting notification is to be displayed and executed on the effect display unit,
The initial operation of the first movable portion is an operation mode in which the first movable portion passes through a position overlapping a front surface of the effect display portion.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is provided with an effect display unit capable of displaying a predetermined game effect, the setting notification is displayed on the effect display unit, and the initial operation of the first movable unit is performed at a position overlapping the front of the effect display unit. The passing operation mode is set. This prevents the setting notification displayed on the effect display unit from being hindered by the initial operation of the first movable unit, ensures the visibility of the setting notification, and reliably notifies that the setting has been changed. It becomes possible. Note that the “initial operation of the first movable unit” means that the first movable unit has no operational defect (whether there is no failure in the movable unit) or the first movable unit is located at the initial position (origin position). This is an operation for (moving to the initial position when located at a place other than the initial position), and is an operation process executed when the power is turned on. It is also called home return operation.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2,
A second movable portion operable in a predetermined operation mode,
Second movable control means for controlling the operation of the second movable portion,
The second movable control unit is configured to perform an initial operation of the second movable unit with the start of power supply by the power supply unit;
The initial operation of the second movable unit is an operation mode that does not pass through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display unit,
After the power supply unit starts power supply, an initial operation of the second movable unit is executed, and thereafter, an initial operation of the first movable unit is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, in addition to the first movable section, the game apparatus includes the second movable section that performs an initial operation in a predetermined operation mode in response to the start of power supply. Unlike the one movable unit, the operation mode does not pass through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display unit. Then, after the power supply is started, the initial operation of the second movable unit is executed, and then the initial operation of the first movable unit is executed. Thereby, the initial operation of the second movable unit that does not impair the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification is performed earlier than the initial operation of the first movable unit that can impair the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification. To be executed. In addition, thereby, the initial operation of the movable portion can be rapidly advanced, and the gaming machine after the power is turned on can be quickly brought into a playable state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-3.
The setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable unit are performed in parallel, and thereafter, the initial operation of the first movable unit is performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable unit can be executed in parallel, and thereafter, the initial operation of the first movable unit is executed. Thereby, the initial operation of the second movable unit that does not hinder the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification is executed first in parallel with the setting notification, and after the setting notification is performed for a predetermined period, the setting notification is displayed. It is possible to execute the initial operation of the first movable unit that can impair the visibility of the effect display unit. Thereby, the initial operation of the first movable unit and the second movable unit can be quickly terminated without hindering the visibility of the setting notification, and the gaming machine after the power is turned on can be quickly brought into a playable state. Become.

  Note that the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable unit are started in parallel, and the initial operation of the second movable unit ends even after the setting notification is performed for a predetermined period (a period sufficient for notification of a setting change). If not, the initial operation of the first movable unit may be executed in parallel with the continuing initial operation of the second movable unit, or may be executed after the initial operation of the second movable unit is completed. May be. When the setting notification is continued after a predetermined period (a period sufficient for notification of the setting change) has elapsed, the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable unit are executed in parallel after the predetermined period has elapsed. May be. In other words, a period during which the initial operation of the first movable unit is not performed may be set as a predetermined period (a period sufficient for notification of a setting change) as the setting notification execution period.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-5 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-4,
Game state information storage means capable of storing game state information, including at least information indicating a judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
Based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage, storage state storage means capable of storing the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply unit starts supplying power, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, a game state information restoring unit that restores the game state information when detecting a drop in power supply voltage,
When the power supply means starts supplying power, erases the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, and game state information initialization means that does not restore the game state information when detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, ,
The determination probability setting means,
When starting the game without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, it is possible to change the determination probability of the determination means,
In the case where the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring unit and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination unit is made unchangeable.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state information including the information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means (also referred to as “setting information”) can be stored and held even after the power supply is stopped. It shall be prepared. When the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit is erased, and the game is selected by the determination probability selecting unit on condition that the game is started without restoring the game state information. It is possible to change to the judgment probability (setting change by the judgment probability setting means). That is, when starting the game by restoring the game state information based on the game state information stored and held by the storage and holding means, it is impossible to change to the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means.

  As a result, in order to change the current setting of the judgment probability to another judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the game state, and the game starts when the setting of the judgment probability is changed. The game state at the time can be set to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide fair games.

(Reference Invention 11)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 is:
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
When the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific result, the special information execution means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner, and executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
A first movable unit operable in a predetermined operation mode,
First movable control means for controlling the operation of the first movable portion,
The first movable control means performs an initial operation of the first movable part with the power supply means starting power supply,
When a predetermined determination probability is set by the determination probability setting means, a setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability has been set is executed,
A setting notification confirming unit that determines whether the setting notification has been performed for a predetermined time,
The first movable control unit executes an initial operation of the first movable unit after determining that the setting notification confirming unit has performed setting notification for a predetermined time after the power supply unit starts supplying power. It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a gaming machine, judgment probability storage means for storing a plurality of judgment probabilities as judgment probabilities of the judgment means, and judgment probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined judgment probability from the plurality of judgment probabilities by a predetermined input operation And determination probability setting means that can set the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. A first movable portion that performs an initial operation in a predetermined operation mode in response to the start of power supply, and, when a predetermined determination probability is set, executes a setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability has been set; Shall be. Also, a setting notification confirming means for confirming that the setting notification has been performed for a predetermined time is provided, and after the power supply is started, after it is determined that the setting notification has been performed for a predetermined time, an initial operation of the first movable unit is performed.

  A first signal transmitting unit that transmits a first signal indicating that the setting notification has been performed after the setting notification has been performed for a predetermined time; The initial operation of the unit may be executed.

  This makes it possible to execute the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable unit, which are executed in response to the start of the power supply, in the order of the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable unit. Further, it is possible to execute the initial operation of the first movable unit after securing the set notification time of the predetermined time. This also prevents the visibility of the setting notification indicating that the setting has been changed from being hindered by the initial operation of the first movable unit, and ensures the visibility of the setting notification for a predetermined period. It is possible to reliably notify that the setting has been changed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1,
Along with the variation display of the identification information, comprises an effect display unit capable of displaying a predetermined game effect,
The setting notification is to be displayed and executed on the effect display unit,
The initial operation of the first movable portion is an operation mode in which the first movable portion passes through a position overlapping a front surface of the effect display portion.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is provided with an effect display unit capable of displaying a predetermined game effect, the setting notification is displayed on the effect display unit, and the initial operation of the first movable unit is performed at a position overlapping the front of the effect display unit. The passing operation mode is set. This prevents the setting notification displayed on the effect display unit from being hindered by the initial operation of the first movable unit, ensures the visibility of the setting notification, and reliably notifies that the setting has been changed. It becomes possible. Note that the “initial operation of the first movable unit” means that the first movable unit has no operational defect (whether there is no failure in the movable unit) or the first movable unit is located at the initial position (origin position). This is an operation for (moving to the initial position when located at a place other than the initial position), and is an operation process executed when the power is turned on. It is also called home return operation.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2,
A second movable portion operable in a predetermined operation mode,
Second movable control means for controlling the operation of the second movable portion,
The second movable control unit is configured to perform an initial operation of the second movable unit with the start of power supply by the power supply unit;
The initial operation of the second movable unit is an operation mode that does not pass through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display unit,
After the power supply unit starts power supply, an initial operation of the second movable unit is executed, and thereafter, an initial operation of the first movable unit is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, in addition to the first movable section, the game apparatus includes the second movable section that performs an initial operation in a predetermined operation mode in response to the start of power supply. Unlike the one movable unit, the operation mode does not pass through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display unit. Then, after the power supply is started, the initial operation of the second movable unit is executed, and then the initial operation of the first movable unit is executed. Thereby, the initial operation of the second movable unit that does not impair the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification is performed earlier than the initial operation of the first movable unit that can impair the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification. To be executed. In addition, thereby, the initial operation of the movable portion can be rapidly advanced, and the gaming machine after the power is turned on can be quickly brought into a playable state.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-4 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3,
The setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable unit are performed in parallel, and thereafter, the initial operation of the first movable unit is performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable unit can be executed in parallel, and thereafter, the initial operation of the first movable unit is executed. Thereby, the initial operation of the second movable unit that does not hinder the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification is executed first in parallel with the setting notification, and after the setting notification is performed for a predetermined period, the setting notification is displayed. It is possible to execute the initial operation of the first movable unit that can impair the visibility of the effect display unit. Thereby, the initial operation of the first movable unit and the second movable unit can be quickly terminated without hindering the visibility of the setting notification, and the gaming machine after the power is turned on can be quickly brought into a playable state. Become.

  Note that the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable unit are started in parallel, and the initial operation of the second movable unit ends even after the setting notification is performed for a predetermined period (a period sufficient for notification of a setting change). If not, the initial operation of the first movable unit may be executed in parallel with the continuing initial operation of the second movable unit, or may be executed after the initial operation of the second movable unit is completed. May be. When the setting notification is continued after a predetermined period (a period sufficient for notification of the setting change) has elapsed, the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable unit are executed in parallel after the predetermined period has elapsed. May be. In other words, a period during which the initial operation of the first movable unit is not performed may be set as a predetermined period (a period sufficient for notification of a setting change) as the setting notification execution period.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-5 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-3 or 11-4.
An initial operation checking unit that determines whether the initial operation of the second movable unit has been completed,
The first movable control unit is configured to execute the first movable unit after the setting notification confirmation unit determines that the setting notification has been performed for a predetermined time and after the initial operation confirmation unit determines that the initial operation has been completed. Is performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, there is provided an initial operation checking means for determining whether or not the initial operation of the second movable portion has been completed. Then, after executing the setting notification for a predetermined time and after the initial operation is completed, the initial operation of the first movable unit is executed. This makes it possible to execute the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable unit performed at the start of the power supply before the initial operation of the first movable unit. In addition, since the setting notification time of the predetermined time is secured and the initial operation of the first movable unit is started after the operation of the second movable unit is completed, the visibility of the setting notification indicating that the setting has been changed is improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the first movable unit from being hindered by the initial operation, and to reliably notify that the setting has been changed.

  Further, after the initial operation of the second movable section is completed, a second signal transmitting means for transmitting a second signal indicating that the initial operation has been completed is provided. Then, after receiving both the first signal transmitted after performing the setting notification for a predetermined time and the second signal transmitted after completing the initial operation of the second movable unit, the initial operation of the first movable unit is performed. May be executed.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-6 is a gaming machine according to Reference Inventions 11-1 to 11-5.
Game state information storage means capable of storing game state information, including at least information indicating a judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
Based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage, storage state storage means capable of storing the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply unit starts supplying power, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, a game state information restoring unit that restores the game state information when detecting a drop in power supply voltage,
When the power supply means starts supplying power, erases the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, and game state information initialization means that does not restore the game state information when detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, ,
The determination probability setting means,
When starting the game without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, it is possible to change the determination probability of the determination means,
In the case where the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring unit and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination unit is made unchangeable.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state information including the information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means (also referred to as “setting information”) can be stored and held even after the power supply is stopped. It shall be prepared. When the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit is erased, and the game is selected by the determination probability selecting unit on condition that the game is started without restoring the game state information. It is possible to change to the judgment probability (setting change by the judgment probability setting means). That is, when starting the game by restoring the game state information based on the game state information stored and held by the storage and holding means, it is impossible to change to the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means.

  As a result, in order to change the current setting of the judgment probability to another judgment probability selected by the judgment probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the game state, and the game starts when the setting of the judgment probability is changed. The game state at the time can be set to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide fair games.

(Reference Invention 12)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 is:
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
When the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific result, the special information execution means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner, and executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
Game information storage means for storing game information including a determination result by the determination means,
Setting probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
First storage holding means capable of holding the game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage;
A second storage unit that can store the setting information stored in the setting probability storage unit for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage;
When the power supply unit starts supplying power, based on the game information stored and held by the first storage unit, a game information restoration unit that can restore the game information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected,
When a predetermined input operation is performed, when the power supply unit starts supplying power, the game information stored and retained by the first storage and retention unit is erased, and a game information that is not restored when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected is restored. Information initialization means,
When the game information initialization means deletes the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed by the determination probability setting means,
When the game information restoring means restores the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means, it is impossible to change the determination probability of the determination means by the determination probability setting means,
In the case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding unit is deleted and the determination probability of the determination unit is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding unit is predetermined normal information. Sometimes,
The game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is deleted, and a game is started with a determination probability of the determination means based on the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, the determination means has a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probabilities, selects a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, and determines the selected determination probability. It can be set as the judgment probability of. A setting probability storage unit for storing setting information indicating the selected (set) determination probability; a game information storage unit for storing game information including a determination result by the determination unit; and a game information storage unit for storing game information even after power supply is stopped. A first memory holding means for holding, a second memory holding means for storing and holding setting information even after the power supply is stopped, a game information restoring means for restoring the game information stored and held, and a memory held by a predetermined input operation Game information initializing means for erasing game information.

  Then, erasing the game information stored and held by the game information initializing means is a condition for changing the setting of the determination probability, and when not deleting the stored game information, the change of the setting of the determination probability is disabled. I have. When the stored game information is deleted and the setting of the determination probability is not changed, if the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is normal (that is, if there is no abnormality), the game information is deleted. The game is initialized, a determination probability based on the setting information stored and stored is set, and the game is started.

  Thereby, in order to change the current setting of the judgment probability to another judgment probability, it is necessary to initialize the game information, and the game state at the start of the game when the setting of the judgment probability is changed is initialized. The state can be set. This makes it possible to provide fair games. In addition, when the game information is initialized, if the change operation of the setting of the determination probability is not performed, if there is no abnormality in the stored setting information, the determination probability is set based on the stored setting information. To start the game. This eliminates the need to set the determination probability again at the time of initializing the game information, and enables efficient setting of the gaming machine.

  The normal information is information indicating a plurality of determination probabilities stored in the determination probability storage means, and is information indicating a determination probability that can be set by the determination probability setting means. For example, when it is possible to set any one of the three (plural) determination probabilities, the three types of settings are referred to as setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3, respectively, and these setting 1, setting 2, or setting 3 Is referred to as normal information. Information that does not indicate the setting 1, the setting 2, or the setting 3 is referred to as abnormal information (abnormal information). Further, the first abnormality determining means for determining whether there is any abnormality in the information stored in the set probability storage means when starting the power supply, and the game information stored in the game information storage means when starting the power supply. A second abnormality determining unit that determines whether there is an abnormality. Further, when the power supply means starts power supply, the apparatus further comprises setting information restoring means for restoring the setting information at the time of detecting a drop in the power supply voltage, based on the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means. And

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1,
In a case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding unit is deleted and the determination probability of the determination unit is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding unit is not predetermined normal information. In some cases, the game cannot be started.

  According to such a gaming machine, the stored game information is deleted, but when the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), there is no abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means. , A determination probability is set based on the setting information, and the game is started. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means, it is impossible to start the game in a state where there is an abnormality. In this way, if there is an abnormality in the setting information, without setting any determination probability, it is ensured that the game cannot be performed before the game starts, and that an unexpected disadvantage is caused to the game store or the player. It can be prevented.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-1 or Reference Invention 12-2,
In a case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding unit is deleted and the determination probability of the determination unit is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding unit is not predetermined normal information. When the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is deleted, the game can be started through the setting of the judgment probability of the judgment means by the judgment probability setting means. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the stored game information is deleted, but when the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), there is no abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means. , A determination probability is set based on the setting information, and the game is started. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means, it is impossible to start the game in a state where there is an abnormality, the game information is erased, and a determination is made with a predetermined input operation. By setting the determination probability by the probability setting means, the game can be started. That is, when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means, the game can be started by deleting the game information and resetting the determination probability. Accordingly, when there is an abnormality in the setting information, it is necessary to set an arbitrary determination probability with a predetermined input operation before starting the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unexpected determination probability from being set or an abnormal determination probability from being set, and to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from occurring in a game store or a player. Become.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-2 or Reference Invention 12-3,
In a case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is deleted and the determination probability of the determination means is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is not predetermined normal information. when,
The information indicating that setting of the determination probability of the determination means by the determination probability setting means is required is provided on a predetermined display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game information stored and erased is deleted, but when the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is abnormal. Performs a notification on a predetermined display unit indicating that it is necessary to perform a predetermined input operation to set a predetermined determination probability by the determination probability setting unit. Thereby, even when the setting information has an abnormality and the game cannot be played (the game does not start), the means for canceling the game disabled state (to make the game playable) can be easily and clearly grasped. It becomes possible.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a fair and efficient gaming machine by setting a predetermined restriction on the setting condition of the determination probability setting function.

(Reference Invention 13)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 is:
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
When the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific result, the special information execution means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner, and executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
Game information storage means for storing game information including a determination result by the determination means,
Setting probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
First storage holding means capable of holding the game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage;
A second storage unit that can store the setting information stored in the setting probability storage unit for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage;
When the power supply unit starts supplying power, based on the game information stored and held by the first storage unit, a game information restoration unit that can restore the game information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected,
When a predetermined input operation is performed, when the power supply unit starts supplying power, the game information stored and retained by the first storage and retention unit is erased, and a game information that is not restored when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected is restored. Information initialization means,
When the game information initialization means deletes the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed by the determination probability setting means,
When the game information restoring means restores the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means, it is impossible to change the determination probability of the determination means by the determination probability setting means,
In the case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is deleted and the determination probability of the determination means is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is predetermined normal information. In some cases, the game information stored and held by the first storage unit is deleted, and a game is started with a determination probability of the determination unit based on the setting information stored and held by the second storage unit,
In a case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is abnormal and the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is predetermined normal information, the first storage and holding is performed. The game information stored and retained by the means is deleted, and the game can be started with the determination probability of the determination means based on the setting information stored and retained by the second storage and retention means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the determination means has a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probabilities, selects a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, and determines the selected determination probability. It can be set as the judgment probability of. A setting probability storage unit for storing setting information indicating the selected (set) determination probability; a game information storage unit for storing game information including a determination result by the determination unit; and a game information storage unit for storing game information even after power supply is stopped. A first memory holding means for holding, a second memory holding means for storing and holding setting information even after the power supply is stopped, a game information restoring means for restoring the game information stored and held, and a memory held by a predetermined input operation Game information initializing means for erasing game information.

  Then, erasing the game information stored and held by the game information initializing means is a condition for changing the setting of the determination probability, and when not deleting the stored game information, the change of the setting of the determination probability is disabled. I have. When the stored game information is deleted and the setting of the determination probability is not changed, if the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is normal (that is, if there is no abnormality), the game information is deleted. The game is initialized, a determination probability based on the setting information stored and stored is set, and the game is started. Further, even when the game information stored and held by the game information initialization means is not deleted, if the stored game information is abnormal and the stored setting information is normal information, the game information is similarly deleted. The game is initialized by setting a determination probability based on the setting information stored and retained.

  Thereby, in order to change the current setting of the judgment probability to another judgment probability, it is necessary to initialize the game information, and the game state at the start of the game when the setting of the judgment probability is changed is initialized. The state can be set. This makes it possible to provide fair games. In addition, when the game information is initialized, if the change operation of the setting of the determination probability is not performed, if there is no abnormality in the stored setting information, the determination probability is set based on the stored setting information. To start the game. In addition, this allows the game information to be initialized even if the game information initialization unit does not perform an operation of deleting the game information when there is an abnormality in the stored game information due to occurrence of some abnormality. Further, if the setting information at this time is normal information, the game can be started without changing the setting of the determination probability. In addition, this eliminates the need to set the determination probability again at the time of initializing the game information, and enables efficient setting of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1,
In the case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is abnormal and the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is not the normal information, it is determined that the game cannot be started. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the stored game information is deleted, but when the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), there is no abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means. , A determination probability is set based on the setting information, and the game is started. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding unit and when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding unit, the game is started in a state where there is an abnormality. It is impossible. In this way, if there is an abnormality in the setting information, without setting any determination probability, it is ensured that the game cannot be performed before the game starts, and that an unexpected disadvantage is caused to the game store or the player. It can be prevented.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-3 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 or Reference Invention 13-2,
If the game information stored and held by the first storage unit is abnormal and the setting information stored and held by the second storage unit is not the normal information, the first storage unit stores The game information is deleted, and the game can be started through the setting of the judgment probability of the judgment means by the judgment probability setting means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the stored game information is deleted, but when the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), there is no abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means. , A determination probability is set based on the setting information, and the game is started. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding unit and when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding unit, the game is started in a state where there is an abnormality. The game can be started by erasing the game information and setting the judgment probability by the judgment probability setting means with a predetermined input operation. That is, when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means, the game can be started by deleting the game information and resetting the determination probability. Accordingly, when there is an abnormality in the setting information, it is necessary to set an arbitrary determination probability with a predetermined input operation before starting the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unexpected determination probability from being set or an abnormal determination probability from being set, and to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from occurring in a game store or a player. Become.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 13-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 13-2 or Reference Invention 13-3.
In a case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is deleted and the determination probability of the determination means is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is not predetermined normal information. when,
The information indicating that setting of the determination probability of the determination means by the determination probability setting means is required is provided on a predetermined display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game information stored and erased is deleted, but when the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is abnormal. Performs a notification on a predetermined display unit indicating that it is necessary to perform a predetermined input operation to set a predetermined determination probability by the determination probability setting unit. Thereby, even when the setting information has an abnormality and the game cannot be played (the game does not start), the means for canceling the game disabled state (to make the game playable) can be easily and clearly grasped. It becomes possible.

(Reference invention 14)
Further, if the gaming machine is capable of changing the setting of the jackpot probability (setting change), the setting of the jackpot probability may be changed during a game or during leaving the seat. Also, if a player plays a game without knowing that the setting has been changed, there is a possibility that the player may suffer an unexpected disadvantage. In addition, depending on how the setting change function is used, there is a possibility that a big hit is easily generated or a big hit is hardly generated, which causes impropriety or a fair gaming machine cannot be provided. .

In view of such problems, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 is:
Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
An identification information display section for variably displaying identification information;
When the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific result, the special information execution means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner, and executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
A gaming machine, wherein when the power supply unit starts supplying power, a setting change of a determination probability of the determination unit is enabled by the predetermined input operation,
During the execution of the setting change, that the setting change is being performed, or comprising a setting display unit that notifies that the setting change has been performed,
The setting display section is provided at a position visible to a player.

  According to such a gaming machine, the determination means has a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability, and when starting the power supply, a predetermined input operation selects a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities, The selected judgment probability can be set as the judgment probability of the judgment means. Also, during the execution of the setting change, it is provided with a setting display unit capable of notifying that the setting change is being executed, or that the setting change has been performed, and the setting display unit is visible to the player. Position. Thereby, even when the setting is changed after the game is started, it is possible to know that the setting has been changed by checking the display mode of the setting display unit. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent a player from suffering an unexpected disadvantage by, for example, making a setting change without a game clerk notifying the player, and to provide a fair gaming machine.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1,
A fixed frame fixed to the island facility,
An open / close frame that is rotatably provided around one end as an axis and that can be opened and closed with respect to the fixed frame,
The determination probability selection means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine,
The setting change is to perform the predetermined input operation by turning the open / close frame to an open state,
The setting display section is provided at a position where a player can visually recognize the setting display section when the setting change is performed by rotating the open / close frame to open the frame.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming machine is provided with a fixed frame and an openable / closable frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the fixed frame. It is provided in. The setting is changed by performing a predetermined input operation in a state in which the open / close frame is rotated with respect to the fixed frame fixed to the island facility to be in an open state and the determination probability selection means on the back side of the gaming machine is accessible. Shall do. The setting display section is provided at a position visible to a player when the open / close frame is turned to an open state.

  Thus, even when the opening / closing frame is rotated by the setting change operation and the direction of the gaming machine (the portion that rotates together with the opening / closing frame) changes, the setting display portion can be visually recognized in the open state. , The player can confirm and grasp that the setting has been changed (or that the setting has been changed).

  This also makes it difficult for a probability setter such as a game clerk to change the setting without the player's knowledge after starting the game (in a state where the player is seated). It becomes possible to make fair and fair gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-3 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-1 or Reference Invention 14-2,
The setting display section is provided at a position that is invisible or difficult to view when the open / close frame is in a closed state, and is easily visible when the open / close frame is in an open state. .

  According to such a gaming machine, the setting display unit is in a position where it is invisible or difficult to see when the open / close frame is in the closed state, and when the open / close frame is turned from the closed state to the open state. It shall be provided in a position easily visible. Thus, the setting display unit can be used as a confirmation display unit when the setting is changed with the open / close frame in the open state. Further, thereby, when the opening / closing frame is in the open state, the player pays attention to the setting display portion which is easily visible at that time, and when the setting is changed, the setting is surely changed ( Or that the setting has been changed).

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-4 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 to Reference Invention 14-3,
The identification information display unit is provided on the front side of the gaming machine,
The display mode of the identification information display unit is easily visible when the open / close frame is in the closed state, and is difficult to view when the open / close frame is in the open state,
The setting display unit is provided on the side of the gaming machine,
The display mode of the setting display section is characterized in that when the open / close frame is in the closed state, it is invisible or difficult to view, and when the open / close frame is in the open state, it is easy to see. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, the identification information display portion is provided on the front surface side of the gaming machine, and the display mode of the identification information display portion is easily visible when the open / close frame is closed, and the open / close frame is In the open state, it is difficult to see. Further, the setting display section is provided on the side of the gaming machine, and the display mode of the setting display section is invisible or difficult to see when the open / close frame is closed, and when the open / close frame is closed. It becomes easy to see. Thereby, the player pays attention to the identification information display unit when the open / close frame is in the closed state, and visually recognizes the setting display unit when the open / close frame is in the open state. Further, thereby, when a setting change or the like is made with the open / close frame being in the open state, it is possible to reliably confirm and grasp that the setting change is made (or that the setting change is made).

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-5 is a gaming machine according to Reference Inventions 14-1 to 14-4,
The setting display unit displays a notification indicating that the setting change is being performed or that the setting change has been performed while the setting change is being performed, and performs an effect display related to the game during the game. It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a gaming machine, the setting display unit performs the setting change during the execution of the setting change, or performs a notification display for notifying that the setting change has been performed, and executes the setting change. During a game that has not been played, an effect display relating to the game shall be displayed. Thus, the setting display unit can be effectively used even during a game in which the setting is not changed.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-6 is a gaming machine according to Reference Inventions 14-1 to 14-5,
A second setting display unit that displays setting information set by the determination probability setting means and enables setting confirmation;
The second setting display section is provided on the back side of the gaming machine,
The display operation of displaying the setting information on the second setting display unit is performed by rotating the open / close frame to be in an open state,
While the setting information is being displayed on the second setting display section, a display for notifying that the setting is being confirmed is performed on the setting display section.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second setting display unit capable of confirming the setting by displaying the setting information of the gaming machine is provided on the back side of the gaming machine, and the setting information is displayed on the second setting display unit. The display operation to be displayed is performed by turning the open / close frame from the closed state to the open state. Then, while the setting information is being displayed on the second setting display unit, that is, while the setting is being confirmed, the setting display unit also performs a notification display for notifying that the setting is being confirmed. This allows the player to confirm whether the setting is being changed by looking at the setting display section when the gaming clerk or the like rotates the opening / closing frame and performs some operation on the back side of the gaming machine. Can be confirmed and grasped more reliably. This also eliminates the player's distrust and makes it possible to provide a fair and fair gaming machine.

Further, as another aspect of the reference invention 14,
A setting display section (first setting display section) for notifying that the setting change is being executed or that the setting change has been made while the setting change (setting change operation) is being executed;
A third setting display unit for notifying that the setting change is being performed or that the setting change has been performed while the setting change (setting change operation) is being performed;
The setting display unit (first setting display unit) is provided on a side surface of the gaming machine, and is provided at a position where the player can visually recognize (easily recognize) when the open / close frame is closed,
The third setting display unit is provided on the front side of the gaming machine, and is provided at a position where the player can visually recognize (easily recognize) the open / close frame.

  Thereby, when the open / close frame is in the open state (when the gaming machine is in the open state), the player is notified by the setting display section (first setting display section) that the setting has been changed (setting change). Is being executed), and when the open / close frame is in the closed state (when the gaming machine is in the closed state), the third setting display unit indicates that the setting has been changed (the setting change Running). In addition, even when the frame of the gaming machine is in the open or closed state, the setting change is monitored, and the setting change is prevented as much as possible at a timing unintended by the player during the game. This can be prevented from occurring. This means that the display directions of the setting display section (first setting display section) and the third setting display section are different.

  In addition, a symbol display unit (a main symbol display unit) that displays a symbol (a main symbol) indicating a result of the hit / non-permission determination (special symbol hit / fail judgment), and an effect display unit that displays a game effect (character, effect symbol). The effect display unit may be provided as the third setting display unit. The display of the second setting display section and the symbol display section is controlled by the main control section (main control section), and the setting display section (also referred to as “first setting display section”) and the third setting display section (effect display). ) May be controlled by a sub-control unit (sub-control unit).

  According to the gaming machine of the fifteenth aspect, by providing a display unit that allows a player to check information on a setting change, a fair gaming machine can be provided.

1 pachinko gaming machine, 7b effect symbol display area (effect symbol display part), 8 effect symbols, 20 first starting port, 21 second starting port, 30 first winning port, 35 second winning port, 39 specific area , 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display), 80 main control board (main control section), 90 sub control board (sub control Part), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a first effect suspension display, 103b second effect suspension display.

Claims (4)

Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
When the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific result, the special information execution means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner, and executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probability that the determination unit determines the specific result;
By a predetermined input operation, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities,
A predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, a determination probability setting means that can be set as the determination probability of the determination means,
Power supply means for supplying power,
Game information storage means for storing game information including a determination result by the determination means,
Setting probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means,
First storage holding means capable of holding the game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage;
A second storage unit that can store the setting information stored in the setting probability storage unit for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in the power supply voltage;
When the power supply unit starts supplying power, based on the game information stored and held by the first storage unit, a game information restoration unit that can restore the game information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected,
When a predetermined input operation is performed, when the power supply unit starts supplying power, the game information stored and retained by the first storage and retention unit is erased, and a game information that is not restored when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected is restored. Information initialization means,
When the game information initialization means deletes the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed by the determination probability setting means,
When the game information restoring means restores the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means, it is impossible to change the determination probability of the determination means by the determination probability setting means,
In the case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is deleted and the determination probability of the determination means is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is predetermined normal information. In some cases, the game information stored and held by the first storage unit is deleted, and a game is started with a determination probability of the determination unit based on the setting information stored and held by the second storage unit,
In a case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is abnormal and the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is predetermined normal information, the first storage and holding is performed. A gaming machine erasing the game information stored and held by the means, and enabling a game to be started with a determination probability of the determination means based on the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means.   In the case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is abnormal and the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is not the normal information, it is determined that the game cannot be started. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein:   If the game information stored and held by the first storage unit is abnormal and the setting information stored and held by the second storage unit is not the normal information, the first storage unit stores the game information. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the game information is deleted, and the game can be started through setting of the judgment probability of the judgment means by the judgment probability setting means. In a case where the game information stored and held by the first storage and holding means is deleted and the determination probability of the determination means is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage and holding means is not predetermined normal information. when,
The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein a notification indicating that setting of the determination probability of the determination means by the determination probability setting means is necessary is performed on a predetermined display unit.